Mercurial > emacs
annotate etc/NEWS @ 26140:068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
author | Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com> |
---|---|
date | Sat, 23 Oct 1999 08:26:16 +0000 |
parents | 5eb182b0c724 |
children | 8fee653decdf |
rev | line source |
---|---|
25853 | 1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 23 Jan 1999 |
2 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
3 See the end for copying conditions. | |
4 | |
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | |
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS. | |
7 | |
8 | |
25995 | 9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
10 | |
11 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using | |
12 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. | |
13 | |
25853 | 14 * Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
15 | |
16 ** Faces and frame parameters. | |
17 | |
18 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | |
19 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
20 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | |
21 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | |
22 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | |
23 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | |
24 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | |
25 | |
26 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | |
27 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | |
28 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the | |
29 `default' face and vice versa. | |
30 | |
25951 | 31 ** New face `menu'. |
32 | |
33 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. | |
34 Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported; | |
35 attempts to set the font are ignored in this case. | |
36 | |
25853 | 37 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
38 | |
39 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | |
40 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | |
41 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | |
42 the screen gamma of a frame's display. | |
43 | |
44 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | |
45 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | |
46 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | |
47 | |
48 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | |
49 `ScreenGamma'. | |
50 | |
51 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. | |
52 | |
53 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | |
54 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | |
55 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | |
56 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | |
57 the text. | |
58 | |
59 ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | |
60 | |
61 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | |
62 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | |
63 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | |
64 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | |
65 specify a font. | |
66 | |
67 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | |
68 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | |
69 under Lisp changes, below. | |
70 | |
71 ** New default font is Courier 12pt. | |
72 | |
73 ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of | |
74 its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise, | |
75 it is hollow. | |
76 | |
77 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display | |
78 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | |
79 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | |
80 customizing face `fringe'. | |
81 | |
82 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You | |
83 can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'. | |
84 | |
85 ** LessTif support. | |
86 | |
87 Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will | |
88 need a version 0.88.1 or later. | |
89 | |
90 ** Toolkit scroll bars. | |
91 | |
92 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for | |
93 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when | |
94 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | |
95 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | |
96 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | |
97 Emacs. | |
98 | |
99 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | |
100 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | |
101 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | |
102 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | |
103 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | |
104 `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | |
105 | |
106 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | |
107 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | |
108 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | |
109 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | |
110 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | |
111 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | |
112 | |
113 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | |
114 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | |
115 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | |
116 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since | |
117 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. | |
118 | |
119 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | |
120 | |
121 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | |
122 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | |
123 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | |
124 | |
125 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. | |
126 | |
127 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | |
128 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | |
129 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | |
130 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | |
131 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | |
132 whitespace. | |
133 | |
134 ** Busy-cursor. | |
135 | |
136 Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the | |
137 display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | |
138 | |
139 ** Blinking cursor | |
140 | |
141 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | |
142 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | |
143 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | |
144 the group `cursor'. | |
145 | |
146 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. | |
147 | |
148 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | |
149 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | |
150 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | |
151 details. | |
152 | |
153 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | |
154 have to do anything to activate it. | |
155 | |
156 ** Tabs and variable-width text. | |
157 | |
158 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | |
159 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | |
160 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | |
161 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | |
162 | |
163 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | |
164 | |
165 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". | |
166 | |
167 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | |
168 | |
169 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the Motif | |
170 one. | |
171 | |
172 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, like in | |
173 Motif. | |
174 | |
175 ** Hscrolling in C code. | |
176 | |
177 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically. | |
178 | |
179 ** Tool bar support. | |
180 | |
181 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | |
182 how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes. | |
183 | |
184 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
185 | |
186 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made | |
187 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode | |
188 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help | |
189 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or | |
190 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one. | |
191 | |
192 Currently, the following actions have been defined: | |
193 | |
194 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two | |
195 buffers. | |
196 | |
197 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and | |
198 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list. | |
199 | |
200 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu. | |
201 | |
202 - Mouse-1 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*') | |
203 toggles the read-only status. | |
204 | |
205 - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu. | |
206 | |
207 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | |
208 | |
209 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | |
210 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialogs' is | |
211 non-nil. | |
212 | |
213 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | |
214 | |
215 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | |
216 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | |
217 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | |
218 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | |
219 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | |
220 attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored. | |
221 | |
222 ** Sound support | |
223 | |
224 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
225 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
226 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
227 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
228 to enable sound support. | |
229 | |
230 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives | |
231 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | |
232 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | |
233 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | |
234 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | |
235 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | |
236 | |
237 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | |
238 | |
239 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. | |
240 | |
241 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | |
242 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | |
243 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | |
244 | |
245 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a | |
246 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi). | |
247 | |
248 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
249 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | |
250 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | |
251 | |
252 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. | |
253 | |
254 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | |
255 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a | |
256 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
257 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. | |
258 | |
259 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | |
260 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a | |
261 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
262 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. | |
263 | |
264 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, | |
265 notably at the end of lines. | |
266 | |
267 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | |
268 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | |
269 | |
270 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like | |
271 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | |
272 after each match to get the replacement text. | |
273 | |
274 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. | |
275 | |
276 If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are | |
277 longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is | |
278 on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size | |
279 by setting the following variable: | |
280 | |
281 - User option: max-mini-window-height | |
282 | |
283 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | |
284 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | |
285 specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize. | |
286 | |
287 Default is 0.25. | |
288 | |
289 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
290 | |
291 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | |
292 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | |
293 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | |
294 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | |
295 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | |
296 can be edited from that buffer. | |
297 | |
298 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | |
299 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | |
300 `A' to use all marked entries). | |
301 | |
302 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | |
303 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | |
304 | |
305 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | |
306 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | |
307 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | |
308 been cited. | |
309 | |
310 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) | |
311 has the following new features: | |
312 | |
313 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | |
314 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | |
315 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | |
316 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | |
317 | |
318 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | |
319 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | |
320 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | |
321 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | |
322 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | |
323 defaults to 1. | |
324 | |
325 ** Tooltips. | |
326 | |
327 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | |
328 mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you | |
329 can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | |
330 | |
331 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | |
332 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | |
333 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | |
334 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | |
335 | |
336 ** Customize changes | |
337 | |
338 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the | |
26096 | 339 `State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will |
340 cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs. | |
25853 | 341 |
342 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill | |
343 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | |
344 default). | |
345 | |
346 ** New features in evaluation commands | |
347 | |
348 The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp | |
349 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables | |
350 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the | |
351 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | |
352 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | |
353 | |
354 ** Dired changes | |
355 | |
356 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete | |
357 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | |
358 is, delete only empty directories. | |
359 | |
360 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy | |
361 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | |
362 copy directories recursively. | |
363 | |
364 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to | |
365 use the -f option when sending mail. | |
366 | |
367 ** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current | |
368 selection into the search string rather than giving an error. | |
369 | |
25929 | 370 ** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file |
371 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash | |
372 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) | |
373 | |
25984 | 374 ** Shell script mode changes. |
375 | |
376 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells | |
377 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and | |
378 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. | |
379 | |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
380 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
381 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
382 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
383 |
26016 | 384 ** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
385 These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14 | |
386 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is | |
387 currently no specific input method support for them. | |
388 | |
25853 | 389 ** New modes and packages |
390 | |
391 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. | |
392 | |
393 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line. | |
394 | |
395 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | |
396 | |
397 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object | |
398 Pascal) language. | |
399 | |
400 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on | |
401 the text at point. | |
402 | |
403 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | |
404 | |
25862 | 405 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
406 | |
25853 | 407 *** whitespace.el ??? |
408 | |
25992 | 409 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
410 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including | |
411 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for | |
412 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and | |
413 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / | |
414 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal | |
415 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. | |
416 | |
417 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. | |
418 | |
419 Here is an example of columns: | |
420 | |
421 horse apple bus | |
422 dog pineapple car EXTRA | |
423 porcupine strawberry airplane | |
424 | |
425 Doing the following settings: | |
426 | |
427 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") | |
428 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") | |
429 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") | |
430 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") | |
431 | |
432 | |
433 Selecting the lines above and typing: | |
434 | |
435 M-x delimit-columns-region | |
436 | |
437 It results: | |
438 | |
439 [ horse , apple , bus , ] | |
440 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] | |
441 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] | |
442 | |
443 delim-col has the following options: | |
444 | |
445 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted | |
446 before all columns. | |
447 | |
448 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted | |
449 between each column. | |
450 | |
451 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted | |
452 after all columns. | |
453 | |
454 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates | |
455 each column. | |
456 | |
457 delim-col has the following commands: | |
458 | |
459 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. | |
460 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. | |
461 | |
26030
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
462 *** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
463 were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
464 is displayed in the "Files" menu. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
465 |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
466 The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
467 |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
468 To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
469 |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
470 To enable recentf at Emacs startup use |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
471 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
472 |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
473 To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
474 M-x customize-group RET recentf RET. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
475 |
25853 | 476 ** Withdrawn packages |
477 | |
478 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | |
479 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | |
26133 | 480 |
481 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el. | |
25853 | 482 |
483 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) | |
484 | |
485 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
486 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
487 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
488 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
489 | |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
490 ** New functions and variables for locales. |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
491 |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
492 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
493 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
494 time functions like strftime. The new variables `messages-locale' and |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
495 `time-locale' give the system locales to be used during the next |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
496 invocations of these two types of functions; the new variables |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
497 `previous-messages-locale' and `previous-time-locale' give the locales |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
498 most recently used. |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
499 |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
500 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
501 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
502 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
503 environment variables. It is normally invoked during startup. It |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
504 uses the new variables `locale-language-names', |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
505 `locale-charset-language-names', and `locale-preferred-coding-systems' |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
506 to make its decisions. |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
507 |
26107
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
508 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
509 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
510 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
511 start sequences. |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
512 |
25910
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
513 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
514 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. |
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
515 |
25853 | 516 ** New function `propertize' |
517 | |
518 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | |
519 strings with text properties. | |
520 | |
521 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | |
522 | |
523 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | |
524 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | |
525 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | |
526 specified value of that property. Example: | |
527 | |
528 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | |
529 | |
530 +++ | |
531 ** push and pop macros. | |
532 | |
533 A simple version of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp | |
534 is now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols | |
535 as the place that holds the list to be changed. | |
536 | |
537 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | |
538 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | |
539 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | |
540 | |
541 +++ | |
542 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such | |
543 as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. | |
544 | |
545 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | |
546 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | |
547 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
548 [:blank:] matches space and tab only | |
549 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
550 space, and DEL. | |
551 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
552 and DEL. | |
553 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | |
554 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
555 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
556 [:alpha:] matches letters. | |
557 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
558 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
559 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
560 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
561 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | |
562 [:punct:] matches punctuation. | |
563 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
564 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
565 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
566 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | |
567 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | |
568 | |
569 +++ | |
570 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. | |
571 | |
572 The following functions are defined for hash tables: | |
573 | |
574 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | |
575 | |
576 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | |
577 are optional. The following arguments are defined: | |
578 | |
579 :test TEST | |
580 | |
581 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | |
582 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | |
583 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | |
584 | |
585 :size SIZE | |
586 | |
587 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | |
588 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | |
589 | |
590 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | |
591 | |
592 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | |
593 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | |
594 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | |
595 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | |
596 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | |
597 | |
598 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | |
599 | |
600 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | |
601 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | |
602 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | |
603 | |
604 :weakness WEAK | |
605 | |
606 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t. | |
607 Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if | |
608 their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the | |
609 hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | |
610 | |
611 - Function: makehash &optional TEST | |
612 | |
613 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | |
614 | |
615 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | |
616 | |
617 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | |
618 | |
619 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | |
620 | |
621 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | |
622 values are shared. | |
623 | |
624 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | |
625 | |
626 Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | |
627 | |
628 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
629 | |
630 Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | |
631 | |
632 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | |
633 | |
634 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | |
635 | |
636 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
637 | |
638 Returns the size of TABLE. | |
639 | |
640 - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE | |
641 | |
642 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | |
643 | |
644 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | |
645 | |
646 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | |
647 | |
648 - Function: clrhash TABLE | |
649 | |
650 Clear TABLE. | |
651 | |
652 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | |
653 | |
654 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | |
655 not found. | |
656 | |
657 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE | |
658 | |
659 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | |
660 another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | |
661 | |
662 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | |
663 | |
664 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | |
665 | |
666 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | |
667 | |
668 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | |
669 arguments KEY and VALUE. | |
670 | |
671 - Function: sxhash OBJ | |
672 | |
673 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | |
674 | |
675 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | |
676 | |
677 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | |
678 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | |
679 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test | |
680 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' | |
681 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | |
682 | |
683 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | |
684 | |
685 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | |
686 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | |
687 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | |
688 | |
689 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | |
690 be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | |
691 | |
692 (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | |
693 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | |
694 | |
695 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | |
696 (sxhash (upcase a))) | |
697 | |
698 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= | |
699 'case-fold-string-hash)) | |
700 | |
701 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | |
702 | |
703 +++ | |
704 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. | |
705 | |
706 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | |
707 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | |
708 a cons cell which is its own cdr. | |
709 | |
710 +++ | |
711 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. | |
712 | |
713 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | |
714 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | |
715 | |
716 You can also do several calls to print functions using a common | |
717 set of #N= constructs; here is how. | |
718 | |
719 (let ((print-circle t) | |
720 (print-continuous-numbering t) | |
721 print-number-table) | |
722 (print1 ...) | |
723 (print1 ...) | |
724 ...) | |
725 | |
726 +++ | |
727 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or | |
728 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | |
729 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | |
730 is too short to reach that column. | |
731 | |
732 +++ | |
733 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may | |
734 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | |
735 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | |
736 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | |
737 | |
738 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | |
739 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | |
740 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | |
741 | |
742 +++ | |
743 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument | |
744 to specify which buffer to return the size of. | |
745 | |
746 +++ | |
747 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook | |
748 calendar-move-hook after moving point. | |
749 | |
750 +++ | |
751 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a | |
752 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | |
753 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | |
754 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | |
755 temporary-file-directory instead. | |
756 | |
757 +++ | |
758 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all | |
759 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | |
760 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | |
761 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | |
762 | |
763 +++ | |
764 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the | |
765 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car. | |
766 | |
767 +++ | |
768 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. | |
769 | |
770 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | |
771 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | |
772 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | |
773 | |
774 +++ | |
775 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' | |
776 | |
777 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | |
778 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | |
779 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | |
780 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | |
781 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | |
782 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | |
783 | |
784 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | |
785 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | |
786 to get an error if the file exists at that time. | |
787 The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | |
788 | |
789 +++ | |
790 ** Function `format' now handles text properties. | |
791 | |
792 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | |
793 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | |
794 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | |
795 result string. | |
796 | |
797 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | |
798 string where arguments appear in the result string. | |
799 | |
800 Example: | |
801 | |
802 (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | |
803 (s2 "world")) | |
804 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | |
805 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | |
26034 | 806 (format s1 s2)) |
25853 | 807 |
808 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | |
809 | |
810 +++ | |
811 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. | |
812 | |
813 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | |
814 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | |
815 argument in it. | |
816 | |
817 (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | |
818 (arg "world")) | |
819 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | |
820 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | |
821 (message msg arg)) | |
822 | |
823 +++ | |
824 ** Sound support | |
825 | |
826 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
827 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
828 | |
829 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
830 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
831 to enable sound support. | |
832 | |
833 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | |
834 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | |
835 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | |
836 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | |
837 sound to play, before playing the sound. | |
838 | |
839 The following sound properties are supported: | |
840 | |
841 - `:file FILE' | |
842 | |
843 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | |
844 searched relative to `data-directory'. | |
845 | |
846 - `:volume VOLUME' | |
847 | |
848 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | |
849 0..1. This property is optional. | |
850 | |
851 Other properties are ignored. | |
852 | |
853 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. | |
854 | |
855 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 | |
856 | |
857 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
858 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
859 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
860 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
861 | |
862 ** New face implementation. | |
863 | |
864 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | |
865 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | |
866 | |
867 +++ | |
868 *** New faces. | |
869 | |
870 Each face can specify the following display attributes: | |
871 | |
872 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | |
873 | |
874 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set | |
875 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | |
876 | |
877 3. Font height in 1/10pt | |
878 | |
879 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. | |
880 | |
881 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. | |
882 | |
883 6. Foreground color. | |
884 | |
885 7. Background color. | |
886 | |
887 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | |
888 | |
889 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | |
890 | |
891 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | |
892 | |
893 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | |
894 | |
895 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | |
896 color. | |
897 | |
898 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | |
899 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | |
900 | |
901 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | |
902 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | |
903 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | |
904 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | |
905 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face | |
906 attributes mentioned above. | |
907 | |
908 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | |
909 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | |
910 created frames. | |
911 | |
912 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified | |
913 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | |
914 `fully-specified'. | |
915 | |
916 +++ | |
917 *** Face merging. | |
918 | |
919 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | |
920 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | |
921 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | |
922 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | |
923 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | |
924 results in a fully-specified face. | |
925 | |
926 +++ | |
927 *** Face realization. | |
928 | |
929 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | |
930 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | |
931 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | |
932 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | |
933 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | |
934 cache of the frame on which it was realized. | |
935 | |
936 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | |
937 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | |
938 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | |
939 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | |
940 | |
941 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | |
942 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | |
943 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | |
944 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | |
945 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | |
946 | |
947 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | |
948 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | |
949 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | |
950 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | |
951 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | |
952 Emacs. | |
953 | |
954 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | |
955 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | |
956 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | |
957 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | |
958 | |
959 ++++ | |
960 **** Clearing face caches. | |
961 | |
962 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | |
963 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | |
964 unused fonts. | |
965 | |
966 +++ | |
967 *** Font selection. | |
968 | |
969 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a | |
970 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | |
971 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | |
972 | |
973 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | |
974 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | |
975 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | |
976 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | |
977 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | |
978 | |
979 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | |
980 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | |
981 match for the given face attributes in this font list. | |
982 | |
983 Font selection can be influenced by the user. | |
984 | |
985 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | |
986 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | |
987 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | |
988 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | |
989 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | |
990 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | |
991 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | |
992 | |
993 Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to | |
994 specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a | |
995 face doesn't exist. | |
996 | |
997 +++ | |
998 **** Scalable fonts | |
999 | |
1000 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | |
1001 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | |
1002 servers. | |
1003 | |
1004 To enable scalable font use, set the variable | |
26034 | 1005 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
25853 | 1006 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
1007 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | |
1008 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | |
1009 that list. Example: | |
1010 | |
1011 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | |
1012 | |
1013 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | |
1014 | |
1015 +++ | |
1016 *** Functions and variables related to font selection. | |
1017 | |
1018 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | |
1019 | |
1020 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | |
1021 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | |
1022 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | |
1023 | |
1024 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | |
1025 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | |
1026 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | |
1027 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | |
1028 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | |
1029 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | |
1030 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | |
1031 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | |
1032 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | |
1033 of the face font sort order. | |
1034 | |
1035 - Function: x-font-family-list | |
1036 | |
1037 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | |
1038 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | |
1039 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | |
1040 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | |
1041 | |
1042 - Variable: font-list-limit | |
1043 | |
1044 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | |
1045 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | |
1046 matching font. The default is currently 100. | |
1047 | |
1048 +++ | |
1049 *** Setting face attributes. | |
1050 | |
1051 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | |
1052 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | |
1053 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | |
1054 `face-attribute'. | |
1055 | |
1056 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | |
1057 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | |
1058 | |
1059 The following attributes are recognized: | |
1060 | |
1061 `:family' | |
1062 | |
1063 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | |
1064 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | |
1065 and `?' are allowed. | |
1066 | |
1067 `:width' | |
1068 | |
1069 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | |
1070 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | |
1071 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | |
1072 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | |
1073 | |
1074 `:height' | |
1075 | |
1076 VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in | |
1077 1/10 pt. | |
1078 | |
1079 `:weight' | |
1080 | |
1081 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
1082 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | |
1083 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | |
1084 | |
1085 `:slant' | |
1086 | |
1087 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
1088 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | |
1089 `reverse-oblique'. | |
1090 | |
1091 `:foreground', `:background' | |
1092 | |
1093 VALUE must be a color name, a string. | |
1094 | |
1095 `:underline' | |
1096 | |
1097 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | |
1098 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | |
1099 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | |
1100 don't underline. | |
1101 | |
1102 `:overline' | |
1103 | |
1104 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | |
1105 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | |
1106 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | |
1107 overline. | |
1108 | |
1109 `:strike-through' | |
1110 | |
1111 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | |
1112 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | |
1113 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | |
1114 is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | |
1115 | |
1116 `:box' | |
1117 | |
1118 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | |
1119 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | |
1120 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | |
1121 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | |
1122 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | |
1123 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | |
1124 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | |
1125 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | |
1126 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | |
1127 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | |
1128 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | |
1129 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | |
1130 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | |
1131 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | |
1132 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | |
1133 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | |
1134 box. | |
1135 | |
1136 `:inverse-video' | |
1137 | |
1138 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | |
1139 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | |
1140 | |
1141 `:stipple' | |
1142 | |
1143 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | |
1144 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | |
1145 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | |
1146 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | |
1147 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | |
1148 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | |
1149 | |
1150 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | |
1151 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | |
1152 | |
1153 `:font' | |
1154 | |
1155 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | |
1156 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | |
1157 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | |
1158 versions of Emacs. | |
1159 | |
1160 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | |
1161 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | |
1162 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | |
1163 | |
1164 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | |
1165 `defface'. | |
1166 | |
1167 *** Face attributes and X resources | |
1168 | |
1169 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | |
1170 from X resources: | |
1171 | |
1172 Face attribute X resource class | |
1173 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1174 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | |
1175 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | |
1176 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | |
1177 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | |
1178 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | |
1179 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | |
1180 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | |
1181 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | |
1182 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | |
1183 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | |
1184 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | |
1185 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | |
1186 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | |
1187 or attributeBackgroundPixmap | |
1188 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap | |
1189 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
1190 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | |
1191 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | |
1192 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
1193 | |
1194 +++ | |
1195 *** Text property `face'. | |
1196 | |
1197 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | |
1198 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | |
1199 specification can be | |
1200 | |
1201 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | |
1202 | |
1203 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | |
1204 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | |
1205 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | |
1206 for face attribute names. | |
1207 | |
1208 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | |
1209 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | |
1210 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | |
1211 | |
1212 +++ | |
1213 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. | |
1214 | |
1215 The function `face-register-tty-color' can be used to define colors | |
1216 for use on TTY frames. It maps a color name to a color number on the | |
1217 terminal. Emacs defines a couple of default color mappings by | |
1218 default. You can get defined colors with a call to | |
1219 `tty-defined-colors'. The function `face-clear-tty-colors' can be | |
1220 used to clear the mapping table. | |
1221 | |
1222 +++ | |
1223 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1224 |
25853 | 1225 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
1226 | |
1227 The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the | |
1228 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. | |
1229 Otherwise, it returns zero. | |
1230 | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1231 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1232 |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1233 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1234 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1235 text-property. |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1236 |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1237 Certain functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1238 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1239 to the boundary between fields (beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1240 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1241 commands continue into the next field if repeated). |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1242 |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1243 The new function constrain-to-field may be used to achieve similar |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1244 behavior; other new field functions include field-beginning, field-end, |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1245 erase-field, and field-string. |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1246 |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1247 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1248 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that many |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1249 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
25853 | 1250 |
1251 +++ | |
1252 ** Image support. | |
1253 | |
1254 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | |
1255 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | |
1256 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | |
1257 replaces the display of the characters having that property. | |
1258 | |
1259 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | |
1260 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | |
1261 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | |
1262 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | |
1263 area. | |
1264 | |
1265 IMAGE is an image specification. | |
1266 | |
1267 *** Image specifications | |
1268 | |
1269 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | |
1270 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | |
1271 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | |
1272 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. | |
1273 | |
1274 The following is a list of properties all image types share. | |
1275 | |
1276 `:ascent ASCENT' | |
1277 | |
1278 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage | |
1279 of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50. | |
1280 | |
1281 `:margin MARGIN' | |
1282 | |
1283 MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as | |
1284 margin around the image. Default is 0. | |
1285 | |
1286 `:relief RELIEF' | |
1287 | |
1288 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | |
1289 around an image. | |
1290 | |
1291 `:algorithm ALGO' | |
1292 | |
1293 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must | |
1294 be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is | |
1295 supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image | |
1296 which is intended to display images "disabled." | |
1297 | |
1298 `:heuristic-mask BG' | |
1299 | |
1300 If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the | |
1301 background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t, | |
1302 determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4 | |
1303 corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from | |
1304 the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must | |
1305 be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the | |
1306 background of the image. | |
1307 | |
1308 `:file FILE' | |
1309 | |
1310 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | |
1311 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | |
1312 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | |
1313 may be present in the image specification. | |
1314 | |
1315 | |
1316 *** Supported image types | |
1317 | |
26034 | 1318 **** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
25853 | 1319 |
1320 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | |
1321 properties supported are | |
1322 | |
1323 `:foreground FG' | |
1324 | |
1325 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default | |
1326 is the frame's foreground. | |
1327 | |
1328 `:background FG' | |
1329 | |
1330 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is | |
1331 the frame's background color. | |
1332 | |
1333 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | |
1334 case, the image specification must contain the following properties | |
1335 instead of a `:file' property. | |
1336 | |
1337 `:width WIDTH' | |
1338 | |
1339 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | |
1340 | |
1341 `:height HEIGHT' | |
1342 | |
1343 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | |
1344 | |
1345 `:data DATA' | |
1346 | |
1347 DATA must be either | |
1348 | |
1349 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | |
1350 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | |
1351 | |
1352 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | |
1353 | |
1354 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | |
1355 bitmap. | |
1356 | |
1357 **** XPM, image type `xpm' | |
1358 | |
1359 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | |
1360 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | |
1361 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | |
1362 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | |
1363 | |
1364 Additional image properties supported are: | |
1365 | |
1366 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | |
1367 | |
1368 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | |
1369 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | |
1370 name. | |
1371 | |
1372 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | |
1373 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | |
1374 | |
1375 `:data DATA' | |
1376 | |
1377 DATA must be a string containing an XPM image. The contents of the | |
1378 string are of the same format as that of XPM files. | |
1379 | |
1380 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able | |
1381 to display compressed images. | |
1382 | |
1383 **** PBM, image type `pbm' | |
1384 | |
1385 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | |
1386 mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties | |
1387 defined. | |
1388 | |
1389 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | |
1390 | |
1391 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | |
1392 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
1393 properties defined. | |
1394 | |
1395 **** TIFF, image type `tiff' | |
1396 | |
1397 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | |
1398 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
1399 properties defined. | |
1400 | |
1401 **** GIF, image type `gif' | |
1402 | |
1403 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | |
1404 `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | |
1405 | |
1406 Additional image properties supported are: | |
1407 | |
1408 `:index INDEX' | |
1409 | |
1410 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | |
1411 multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large. | |
1412 | |
1413 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | |
1414 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | |
1415 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | |
1416 every 0.1 seconds. | |
1417 | |
1418 (defun show-anim (file max) | |
1419 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | |
1420 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | |
1421 | |
1422 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | |
1423 (when (= idx max) | |
1424 (setq idx 0)) | |
1425 (let ((img (create-image file nil :index idx))) | |
1426 (save-excursion | |
1427 (set-buffer buffer) | |
1428 (goto-char (point-min)) | |
1429 (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | |
1430 (insert-image img "x")) | |
1431 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | |
1432 | |
1433 **** PNG, image type `png' | |
1434 | |
1435 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | |
1436 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
1437 properties defined. | |
1438 | |
1439 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | |
1440 | |
1441 Additional image properties supported are: | |
1442 | |
1443 `:pt-width WIDTH' | |
1444 | |
1445 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | |
26034 | 1446 integer. This is a required property. |
25853 | 1447 |
1448 `:pt-height HEIGHT' | |
1449 | |
1450 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | |
26034 | 1451 must be a integer. This is an required property. |
25853 | 1452 |
1453 `:bounding-box BOX' | |
1454 | |
1455 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | |
1456 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | |
1457 files. This is an required property. | |
1458 | |
1459 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | |
1460 lisp/gs.el. | |
1461 | |
1462 *** Lisp interface. | |
1463 | |
1464 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types | |
1465 which are supported in the current configuration. | |
1466 | |
1467 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | |
1468 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | |
1469 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | |
1470 manually. | |
1471 | |
1472 *** Simplified image API, image.el | |
1473 | |
1474 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | |
1475 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | |
1476 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | |
1477 define an image based on available image types. The functions | |
1478 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | |
1479 buffer. | |
1480 | |
1481 +++ | |
1482 ** Display margins. | |
1483 | |
1484 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | |
1485 and images. | |
1486 | |
1487 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | |
1488 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | |
1489 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | |
1490 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | |
1491 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
1492 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
1493 of the display margins. | |
1494 | |
1495 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | |
1496 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | |
1497 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | |
1498 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | |
1499 in this file). | |
1500 | |
1501 +++ | |
1502 ** Help display | |
1503 | |
1504 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | |
1505 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | |
1506 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | |
1507 that have a `help-echo' property. | |
1508 | |
1509 The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar | |
1510 items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display. | |
1511 If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is | |
1512 evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the | |
1513 tool-bar item is used. | |
1514 | |
1515 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | |
1516 help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the | |
1517 help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. | |
1518 | |
1519 +++ | |
1520 ** Vertical fractional scrolling. | |
1521 | |
1522 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | |
1523 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | |
1524 | |
1525 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | |
1526 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | |
1527 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | |
1528 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | |
1529 used. | |
1530 | |
1531 (global-set-key [A-down] | |
1532 #'(lambda () | |
1533 (interactive) | |
1534 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) | |
1535 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) | |
1536 (global-set-key [A-up] | |
1537 #'(lambda () | |
1538 (interactive) | |
1539 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) | |
1540 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) | |
1541 | |
1542 +++ | |
1543 ** New hook `fontification-functions'. | |
1544 | |
1545 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | |
1546 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | |
1547 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | |
1548 is called with one argument, POS. | |
1549 | |
1550 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | |
1551 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | |
1552 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | |
1553 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | |
1554 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | |
1555 | |
1556 +++ | |
1557 ** Tool bar support. | |
1558 | |
1559 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | |
1560 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | |
1561 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | |
1562 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | |
1563 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | |
1564 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | |
1565 | |
1566 *** Tool bar item definitions | |
1567 | |
1568 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | |
1569 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | |
1570 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | |
1571 | |
1572 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is | |
1573 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | |
1574 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | |
1575 property (see below). | |
1576 | |
1577 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as | |
1578 binding are currently ignored. | |
1579 | |
1580 The following properties are recognized: | |
1581 | |
1582 `:enable FORM'. | |
1583 | |
1584 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled | |
1585 or disabled. | |
1586 | |
1587 `:visible FORM' | |
1588 | |
1589 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. | |
1590 | |
1591 `:filter FUNCTION' | |
1592 | |
1593 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | |
1594 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | |
1595 used instead of BINDING to display this item. | |
1596 | |
1597 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' | |
1598 | |
1599 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | |
1600 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | |
1601 | |
1602 `:image IMAGES' | |
1603 | |
1604 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | |
1605 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | |
1606 meaning of each of the four elements: | |
1607 | |
1608 Index Use when item is | |
1609 ---------------------------------------- | |
1610 0 enabled and selected | |
1611 1 enabled and deselected | |
1612 2 disabled and selected | |
1613 3 disabled and deselected | |
1614 | |
1615 `:help HELP-STRING'. | |
1616 | |
1617 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help | |
1618 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | |
1619 | |
1620 *** Tool-bar-related variables. | |
1621 | |
1622 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | |
1623 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | |
1624 than 1/4 of the frame's size. | |
1625 | |
1626 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be | |
1627 raised when the mouse moves over them. | |
1628 | |
1629 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | |
1630 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | |
1631 pixels. Default is 1. | |
1632 | |
1633 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | |
1634 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | |
1635 | |
1636 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | |
1637 | |
1638 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | |
1639 a tool bar item. If | |
1640 | |
1641 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | |
1642 '(menu-item "Shell" shell | |
1643 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | |
1644 | |
1645 is the original tool bar item definition, then | |
1646 | |
1647 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | |
1648 | |
1649 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | |
1650 item. | |
1651 | |
1652 ** Mode line changes. | |
1653 | |
1654 +++ | |
1655 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
1656 | |
1657 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | |
1658 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | |
1659 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | |
1660 | |
1661 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | |
1662 a `local-map' text property. | |
1663 | |
1664 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | |
1665 that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | |
1666 | |
1667 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | |
1668 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | |
1669 `local-map' property. | |
1670 | |
1671 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | |
1672 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | |
1673 example. | |
1674 | |
1675 +++ | |
1676 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local | |
1677 variable mode-line-format to nil. | |
1678 | |
1679 +++ | |
1680 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. | |
1681 | |
1682 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | |
1683 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | |
1684 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | |
1685 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | |
1686 line. | |
1687 | |
1688 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | |
1689 `header-line'. | |
1690 | |
1691 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | |
1692 position in the header-line. | |
1693 | |
1694 +++ | |
1695 ** Text property `display' | |
1696 | |
1697 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and | |
1698 also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the | |
1699 `display' property should be a display specification, as described | |
1700 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. | |
1701 | |
1702 *** Variable width and height spaces | |
1703 | |
1704 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | |
1705 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | |
1706 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | |
1707 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | |
1708 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | |
1709 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
1710 simpler form STRETCH as property value. | |
1711 | |
1712 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | |
1713 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | |
1714 properties described below. | |
1715 | |
1716 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | |
1717 characters having the `display' property. | |
1718 | |
1719 - :width WIDTH | |
1720 | |
1721 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | |
1722 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | |
1723 | |
1724 - :relative-width FACTOR | |
1725 | |
1726 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | |
1727 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | |
1728 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | |
1729 width of that character by FACTOR. | |
1730 | |
1731 - :align-to HPOS | |
1732 | |
1733 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | |
1734 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | |
1735 | |
1736 Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | |
1737 | |
1738 - :height HEIGHT | |
1739 | |
1740 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | |
1741 normal line height. | |
1742 | |
1743 - :relative-height FACTOR | |
1744 | |
1745 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | |
1746 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | |
1747 | |
1748 - :ascent ASCENT | |
1749 | |
1750 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | |
1751 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | |
1752 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | |
1753 equal to 100. | |
1754 | |
1755 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | |
1756 | |
1757 *** Images | |
1758 | |
1759 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | |
1760 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | |
1761 in the display, the characters having this display specification in | |
1762 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | |
1763 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | |
1764 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | |
1765 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | |
1766 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | |
1767 as display specification. | |
1768 | |
1769 *** Other display properties | |
1770 | |
1771 - :space-width FACTOR | |
1772 | |
1773 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | |
1774 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | |
1775 integer or float. | |
1776 | |
1777 - :height HEIGHT | |
1778 | |
1779 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | |
1780 | |
1781 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | |
1782 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | |
1783 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | |
1784 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | |
1785 a font is available counts as a step. | |
1786 | |
1787 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | |
1788 as tall as the frame's default font. | |
1789 | |
1790 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | |
1791 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | |
1792 | |
1793 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | |
1794 `height' bound to the current specified font height. | |
1795 | |
1796 - :raise FACTOR | |
1797 | |
1798 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | |
1799 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | |
1800 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | |
1801 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | |
1802 `:height' subproperty. | |
1803 | |
1804 *** Conditional display properties | |
1805 | |
1806 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | |
1807 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC | |
1808 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. | |
1809 During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of | |
1810 the text having the `display' property. | |
1811 | |
1812 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | |
1813 `(:when t SPEC)'. | |
1814 | |
1815 +++ | |
1816 ** New menu separator types. | |
1817 | |
1818 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | |
1819 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | |
1820 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | |
1821 to specify other menu separator types. | |
1822 | |
1823 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | |
1824 | |
1825 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | |
1826 separator occurs. | |
1827 | |
1828 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | |
1829 | |
1830 A single line in the menu's foreground color. | |
1831 | |
1832 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | |
1833 | |
1834 A double line in the menu's foreground color. | |
1835 | |
1836 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | |
1837 | |
1838 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
1839 | |
1840 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | |
1841 | |
1842 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
1843 | |
1844 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | |
1845 | |
1846 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form | |
1847 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. | |
1848 | |
1849 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | |
1850 | |
1851 A single line with 3D raised appearance. | |
1852 | |
1853 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | |
1854 | |
1855 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | |
1856 | |
1857 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | |
1858 | |
1859 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | |
1860 | |
1861 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | |
1862 | |
1863 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
1864 | |
1865 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | |
1866 | |
1867 Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
1868 | |
1869 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | |
1870 | |
1871 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
1872 | |
1873 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | |
1874 | |
1875 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
1876 | |
1877 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | |
1878 the corresponding single-line separators. | |
1879 | |
1880 +++ | |
1881 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. | |
1882 | |
1883 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
1884 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | |
1885 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | |
1886 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | |
1887 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | |
1888 default background is the background color of the frame, and the | |
1889 default foreground is black. | |
1890 | |
1891 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | |
1892 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | |
1893 `ScrollBarBackground'). | |
1894 | |
1895 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | |
1896 settings for scroll bar colors. | |
1897 | |
1898 +++ | |
1899 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent | |
1900 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | |
1901 | |
1902 --- | |
1903 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it | |
1904 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | |
1905 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | |
1906 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | |
1907 the original window start. | |
1908 | |
1909 --- | |
1910 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions | |
1911 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | |
1912 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | |
1913 | |
1914 +++ | |
1915 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. | |
1916 | |
1917 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | |
1918 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | |
1919 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | |
1920 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
1921 | |
1922 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | |
1923 fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
1924 | |
1925 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | |
1926 | |
1927 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | |
1928 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | |
1929 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | |
1930 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | |
1931 temporarily to nil, for example | |
1932 | |
1933 (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | |
1934 (enlarge-window 10)) | |
1935 | |
1936 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, | |
1937 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. | |
1938 | |
1939 * Changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
1940 | |
1941 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | |
1942 | |
1943 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | |
1944 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | |
1945 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | |
1946 | |
1947 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | |
1948 is the one that is used. | |
1949 | |
1950 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | |
1951 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | |
1952 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | |
1953 separate from the command's regular output. | |
1954 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | |
1955 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | |
1956 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | |
1957 the buffer name. | |
1958 | |
1959 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | |
1960 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | |
1961 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | |
1962 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | |
1963 | |
1964 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | |
1965 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | |
1966 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | |
1967 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | |
1968 | |
1969 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | |
1970 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | |
1971 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | |
1972 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | |
1973 | |
1974 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | |
1975 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | |
1976 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | |
1977 they never ignore case. | |
1978 | |
1979 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | |
1980 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | |
1981 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | |
1982 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | |
1983 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | |
1984 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | |
1985 part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | |
1986 | |
1987 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | |
1988 the same format that was used in the file before. | |
1989 | |
1990 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | |
1991 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | |
1992 | |
1993 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | |
1994 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | |
1995 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | |
1996 | |
1997 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | |
1998 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | |
1999 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | |
2000 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | |
2001 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | |
2002 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | |
2003 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | |
2004 | |
2005 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | |
2006 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | |
2007 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | |
2008 format. You can now customize these variables. | |
2009 | |
2010 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | |
2011 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | |
2012 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | |
2013 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | |
2014 | |
2015 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | |
2016 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | |
2017 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | |
2018 | |
2019 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | |
2020 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | |
2021 doesn't have any effect. | |
2022 | |
2023 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | |
2024 not one per buffer. | |
2025 | |
2026 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | |
2027 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | |
2028 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | |
2029 | |
2030 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | |
2031 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | |
2032 `auto-show-mode' command. | |
2033 | |
2034 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | |
2035 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | |
2036 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | |
2037 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | |
2038 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | |
2039 | |
2040 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | |
2041 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | |
2042 | |
2043 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | |
2044 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | |
2045 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | |
2046 | |
2047 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | |
2048 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | |
2049 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | |
2050 and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | |
2051 | |
2052 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | |
2053 | |
2054 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | |
2055 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | |
2056 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | |
2057 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | |
2058 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | |
2059 | |
2060 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | |
2061 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | |
2062 | |
2063 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | |
2064 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | |
2065 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | |
2066 `?' on other systems. | |
2067 | |
2068 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | |
2069 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | |
2070 Unix. | |
2071 | |
2072 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | |
2073 current codepage when it starts. | |
2074 | |
2075 ** Mail changes | |
2076 | |
2077 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the | |
2078 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | |
2079 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | |
2080 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | |
2081 buffer-file-coding-system. | |
2082 | |
2083 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | |
2084 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | |
2085 mail. | |
2086 | |
2087 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | |
2088 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | |
2089 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | |
2090 list of possible coding systems. | |
2091 | |
2092 ** CC Mode changes | |
2093 | |
2094 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | |
2095 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | |
2096 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | |
2097 docstring for details. | |
2098 | |
2099 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | |
2100 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | |
2101 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | |
2102 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | |
2103 lineup functions use this feature currently. | |
2104 | |
2105 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | |
2106 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | |
2107 | |
2108 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | |
2109 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | |
2110 | |
2111 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | |
2112 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | |
2113 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | |
2114 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | |
2115 anonymous classes. | |
2116 | |
2117 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | |
2118 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | |
2119 | |
2120 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | |
2121 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | |
2122 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | |
2123 function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | |
2124 | |
2125 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | |
2126 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | |
2127 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | |
2128 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | |
2129 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | |
2130 | |
2131 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | |
2132 | |
2133 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | |
2134 | |
2135 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | |
2136 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | |
2137 | |
2138 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | |
2139 | |
2140 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | |
2141 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | |
2142 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | |
2143 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | |
2144 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | |
2145 | |
2146 ** Gnus changes. | |
2147 | |
2148 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | |
2149 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | |
2150 Gnus manual for the full story. | |
2151 | |
2152 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | |
2153 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | |
2154 group, which is created automatically. | |
2155 | |
2156 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | |
2157 values. | |
2158 | |
2159 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | |
2160 | |
2161 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | |
2162 outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | |
2163 | |
2164 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | |
2165 `C-u C-c C-c'. | |
2166 | |
2167 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | |
2168 | |
2169 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | |
2170 re-highlighting of the article buffer. | |
2171 | |
2172 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | |
2173 | |
2174 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | |
2175 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
2176 | |
2177 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | |
2178 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | |
2179 | |
2180 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | |
2181 control over simplification. | |
2182 | |
2183 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | |
2184 | |
2185 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | |
2186 limit. | |
2187 | |
2188 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | |
2189 | |
2190 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | |
2191 | |
2192 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. | |
2193 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must | |
2194 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | |
2195 | |
2196 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix | |
2197 `a' forces normal posting method. | |
2198 | |
2199 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | |
2200 -- `W d'. | |
2201 | |
2202 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | |
2203 to a non-nil value. | |
2204 | |
2205 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | |
2206 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | |
2207 | |
2208 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | |
2209 has been added. | |
2210 | |
2211 *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | |
2212 | |
2213 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | |
2214 | |
2215 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | |
2216 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | |
2217 | |
2218 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | |
2219 `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | |
2220 | |
2221 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | |
2222 | |
2223 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | |
2224 been added. | |
2225 | |
2226 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | |
2227 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | |
2228 | |
2229 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | |
2230 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | |
2231 | |
2232 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | |
2233 | |
2234 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | |
2235 | |
2236 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | |
2237 | |
2238 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | |
2239 | |
2240 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | |
2241 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | |
2242 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | |
2243 | |
2244 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | |
2245 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | |
2246 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | |
2247 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | |
2248 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | |
2249 | |
2250 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | |
2251 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | |
2252 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | |
2253 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | |
2254 | |
2255 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | |
2256 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | |
2257 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | |
2258 mismatch. | |
2259 | |
2260 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
2261 | |
2262 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | |
2263 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | |
2264 | |
2265 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | |
2266 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | |
2267 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | |
2268 removed from the label. | |
2269 | |
2270 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | |
2271 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | |
2272 | |
2273 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | |
2274 customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | |
2275 | |
2276 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | |
2277 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | |
2278 expressions. | |
2279 | |
2280 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | |
2281 | |
2282 ** New/deleted modes and packages | |
2283 | |
2284 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | |
2285 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
2286 | |
2287 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | |
2288 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | |
2289 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
2290 | |
2291 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer | |
2292 changes with a special face. | |
2293 | |
2294 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | |
2295 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | |
2296 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | |
2297 | |
2298 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
2299 | |
2300 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | |
2301 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | |
2302 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | |
2303 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | |
2304 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | |
2305 | |
2306 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | |
2307 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | |
2308 distribution when the config.bat script is run. | |
2309 | |
2310 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | |
2311 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | |
2312 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | |
2313 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | |
2314 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | |
2315 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | |
2316 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | |
2317 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | |
2318 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | |
2319 | |
2320 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | |
2321 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | |
2322 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | |
2323 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | |
2324 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | |
2325 program. | |
2326 | |
2327 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | |
2328 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | |
2329 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | |
2330 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | |
2331 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | |
2332 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | |
2333 | |
2334 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | |
2335 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | |
2336 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | |
2337 was not documented clearly before. | |
2338 | |
2339 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | |
2340 This includes Tetris and Snake. | |
2341 | |
2342 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
2343 | |
2344 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | |
2345 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | |
2346 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | |
2347 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | |
2348 | |
2349 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | |
2350 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | |
2351 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | |
2352 | |
2353 ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | |
2354 | |
2355 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | |
2356 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | |
2357 | |
2358 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
2359 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | |
2360 integers. | |
2361 | |
2362 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | |
2363 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | |
2364 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | |
2365 file names and attributes are returned. | |
2366 | |
2367 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | |
2368 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | |
2369 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes. | |
2370 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and | |
2371 returns the result. | |
2372 | |
2373 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | |
2374 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | |
2375 | |
2376 ** New functions for base64 conversion: | |
2377 | |
2378 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | |
2379 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | |
2380 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | |
2381 optionally. | |
2382 | |
2383 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | |
2384 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | |
2385 | |
2386 ** | |
2387 The new function process-running-child-p | |
2388 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | |
2389 terminal to its own child process. | |
2390 | |
2391 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | |
2392 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | |
2393 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | |
2394 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | |
2395 | |
2396 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | |
2397 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | |
2398 | |
2399 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. | |
2400 :included is an alias for :visible. | |
2401 | |
2402 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | |
2403 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | |
2404 to move or copy menu entries. | |
2405 | |
2406 ** Multibyte editing changes | |
2407 | |
2408 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | |
2409 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | |
2410 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | |
2411 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | |
2412 char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | |
2413 (setq char (sref str idx) | |
2414 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | |
2415 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | |
2416 | |
2417 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | |
2418 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | |
2419 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | |
2420 | |
2421 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | |
2422 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | |
2423 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | |
2424 | |
2425 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted | |
2426 | |
2427 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | |
2428 across the boundary. | |
2429 | |
2430 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | |
2431 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | |
2432 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | |
2433 contains 8-bit characters. | |
2434 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | |
2435 contains invalid characters. | |
2436 | |
2437 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | |
2438 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | |
2439 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | |
2440 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | |
2441 way. | |
2442 | |
2443 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | |
2444 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | |
2445 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | |
2446 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | |
2447 | |
2448 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | |
2449 compose Thai characters in a string. | |
2450 | |
2451 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | |
2452 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | |
2453 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | |
2454 menus should always use the third argument. | |
2455 | |
2456 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | |
2457 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | |
2458 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | |
2459 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | |
2460 | |
2461 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | |
2462 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | |
2463 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | |
2464 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | |
2465 | |
2466 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | |
2467 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | |
2468 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | |
2469 echo area contents. | |
2470 | |
2471 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | |
2472 | |
2473 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | |
2474 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | |
2475 requested feature cannot be loaded. | |
2476 | |
2477 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | |
2478 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | |
2479 means to clear out that attribute. | |
2480 | |
2481 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | |
2482 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | |
2483 | |
2484 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | |
2485 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | |
2486 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | |
2487 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | |
2488 | |
2489 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | |
2490 the gap of the current buffer. | |
2491 | |
2492 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | |
2493 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | |
2494 current buffer. | |
2495 | |
2496 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | |
2497 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | |
2498 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | |
2499 it back in after any modifications have been made. | |
2500 | |
2501 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
2502 | |
2503 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | |
2504 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | |
2505 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | |
2506 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | |
2507 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | |
2508 | |
2509 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | |
2510 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | |
2511 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | |
2512 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | |
2513 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | |
2514 | |
2515 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | |
2516 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | |
2517 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | |
2518 | |
2519 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | |
2520 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | |
2521 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | |
2522 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | |
2523 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | |
2524 results. | |
2525 | |
2526 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | |
2527 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | |
2528 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | |
2529 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | |
2530 | |
2531 * Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
2532 | |
2533 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | |
2534 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | |
2535 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | |
2536 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | |
2537 | |
2538 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | |
2539 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | |
2540 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | |
2541 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | |
2542 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | |
2543 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | |
2544 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | |
2545 region. | |
2546 | |
2547 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | |
2548 selective undo. | |
2549 | |
2550 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | |
2551 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | |
2552 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | |
2553 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | |
2554 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | |
2555 | |
2556 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | |
2557 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | |
2558 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | |
2559 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
2560 | |
2561 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | |
2562 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | |
2563 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | |
2564 something that most users not do. | |
2565 | |
2566 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | |
2567 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | |
2568 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | |
2569 applications. | |
2570 | |
2571 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | |
2572 pasting operations. | |
2573 | |
2574 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | |
2575 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | |
2576 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | |
2577 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | |
2578 `ps-printer-name'. | |
2579 | |
2580 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | |
2581 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | |
2582 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | |
2583 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | |
2584 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | |
2585 hits a new word. | |
2586 | |
2587 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | |
2588 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | |
2589 to be confused by TeX commands. | |
2590 | |
2591 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | |
2592 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | |
2593 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | |
2594 of various alternative replacements and actions. | |
2595 | |
2596 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | |
2597 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | |
2598 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | |
2599 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | |
2600 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | |
2601 | |
2602 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | |
2603 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | |
2604 | |
2605 ** Changes in input method usage. | |
2606 | |
2607 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | |
2608 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | |
2609 respectively. | |
2610 | |
2611 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | |
2612 | |
2613 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | |
2614 of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | |
2615 | |
2616 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | |
2617 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | |
2618 | |
2619 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | |
2620 | |
2621 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | |
2622 | |
2623 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | |
2624 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | |
2625 | |
2626 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | |
2627 given in the following case: | |
2628 o When you are using a complex input method. | |
2629 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | |
2630 | |
2631 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | |
2632 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | |
2633 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | |
2634 setting it to t is helpful. | |
2635 | |
2636 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | |
2637 | |
2638 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | |
2639 keys: | |
2640 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | |
2641 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | |
2642 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | |
2643 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | |
2644 environment. | |
2645 | |
2646 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | |
2647 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | |
2648 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | |
2649 get | |
2650 | |
2651 /usr/foo//etc/passwd | |
2652 | |
2653 which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | |
2654 | |
2655 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | |
2656 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | |
2657 | |
2658 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | |
2659 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | |
2660 its owner and group. | |
2661 | |
2662 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | |
2663 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | |
2664 | |
2665 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | |
2666 contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
2667 | |
2668 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | |
2669 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | |
2670 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | |
2671 by the left edge of the rectangle. | |
2672 | |
2673 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | |
2674 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | |
2675 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | |
2676 for writing keyboard macros. | |
2677 | |
2678 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | |
2679 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | |
2680 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | |
2681 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | |
2682 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | |
2683 info. | |
2684 | |
2685 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | |
2686 | |
2687 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | |
2688 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | |
2689 contents only. | |
2690 | |
2691 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | |
2692 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | |
2693 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | |
2694 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | |
2695 | |
2696 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | |
2697 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | |
2698 literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | |
2699 | |
2700 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | |
2701 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | |
2702 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | |
2703 inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | |
2704 | |
2705 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | |
2706 failure if the command produces no output. | |
2707 | |
2708 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | |
2709 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | |
2710 the mouse. | |
2711 | |
2712 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | |
2713 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | |
2714 function and variable names. | |
2715 | |
2716 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | |
2717 reading specific files. This has higher priority than | |
2718 file-coding-system-alist. | |
2719 | |
2720 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | |
2721 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | |
2722 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | |
2723 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | |
2724 according to the current fontset. | |
2725 | |
2726 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | |
2727 | |
2728 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | |
2729 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | |
2730 nonascii-insert-offset. | |
2731 | |
2732 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | |
2733 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | |
2734 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | |
2735 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | |
2736 | |
2737 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | |
2738 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | |
2739 | |
2740 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | |
2741 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | |
2742 | |
2743 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | |
2744 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | |
2745 command keys. | |
2746 | |
2747 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | |
2748 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | |
2749 | |
2750 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | |
2751 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | |
2752 all variables that have documentation. | |
2753 | |
2754 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | |
2755 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | |
2756 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | |
2757 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | |
2758 it should show; the default is 20. | |
2759 | |
2760 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | |
2761 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | |
2762 of your input. | |
2763 | |
2764 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | |
2765 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | |
2766 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | |
2767 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | |
2768 the customizable options which were changed since that version. | |
2769 Newly added options are included as well. | |
2770 | |
2771 If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | |
2772 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | |
2773 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | |
2774 | |
2775 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | |
2776 Customize menu. | |
2777 | |
2778 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | |
2779 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | |
2780 | |
2781 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | |
2782 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | |
2783 invoked. | |
2784 | |
2785 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | |
2786 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | |
2787 The default is 1. | |
2788 | |
2789 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | |
2790 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | |
2791 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | |
2792 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | |
2793 sensibly. | |
2794 | |
2795 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | |
2796 | |
2797 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | |
2798 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | |
2799 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | |
2800 | |
2801 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | |
2802 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | |
2803 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | |
2804 every night. | |
2805 | |
2806 ** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | |
2807 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. | |
2808 | |
2809 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to | |
2810 read and post multi-lingual articles. | |
2811 | |
2812 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | |
2813 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | |
2814 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | |
2815 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | |
2816 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | |
2817 made invisible again. | |
2818 | |
2819 ** Mail reading and sending changes | |
2820 | |
2821 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | |
2822 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | |
2823 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | |
2824 toggle. | |
2825 | |
2826 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | |
2827 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | |
2828 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | |
2829 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | |
2830 rmail-default-body-file. | |
2831 | |
2832 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | |
2833 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | |
2834 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | |
2835 | |
2836 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | |
2837 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | |
2838 is evaluated to insert the signature. | |
2839 | |
2840 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | |
2841 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | |
2842 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | |
2843 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | |
2844 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | |
2845 especially interested in trying feedmail. | |
2846 | |
2847 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | |
2848 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | |
2849 provided by feedmail are: | |
2850 | |
2851 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | |
2852 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | |
2853 there is also a queue for draft messages | |
2854 | |
2855 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | |
2856 be prompted for confirmation | |
2857 | |
2858 **** does smart filling of address headers | |
2859 | |
2860 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | |
2861 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | |
2862 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | |
2863 | |
2864 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | |
2865 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | |
2866 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | |
2867 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) | |
2868 | |
2869 ** Dired changes | |
2870 | |
2871 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | |
2872 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | |
2873 | |
2874 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | |
2875 run Dired on the directory name at point. | |
2876 | |
2877 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | |
2878 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | |
2879 for a specified regexp. | |
2880 | |
2881 ** VC Changes | |
2882 | |
2883 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | |
2884 conveniently. | |
2885 | |
2886 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | |
2887 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | |
2888 Dired. | |
2889 | |
2890 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | |
2891 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | |
2892 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | |
2893 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | |
2894 | |
2895 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | |
2896 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | |
2897 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | |
2898 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | |
2899 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | |
2900 | |
2901 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | |
2902 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | |
2903 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | |
2904 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | |
2905 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | |
2906 | |
2907 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | |
2908 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | |
2909 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, | |
2910 `* l', to mark all files currently locked. | |
2911 | |
2912 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | |
2913 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | |
2914 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | |
2915 | |
2916 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | |
2917 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | |
2918 session to resolve them. | |
2919 | |
2920 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | |
2921 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | |
2922 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | |
2923 uses as well). | |
2924 | |
2925 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | |
2926 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | |
2927 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | |
2928 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | |
2929 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | |
2930 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | |
2931 using ediff. | |
2932 | |
2933 ** Changes in Font Lock | |
2934 | |
2935 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | |
2936 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | |
2937 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | |
2938 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | |
2939 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | |
2940 | |
2941 ** Frame name display changes | |
2942 | |
2943 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | |
2944 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | |
2945 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | |
2946 when many frames are invisible or iconified. | |
2947 | |
2948 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | |
2949 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | |
2950 menu. | |
2951 | |
2952 ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
2953 | |
2954 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | |
2955 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | |
2956 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | |
2957 | |
2958 *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | |
2959 | |
2960 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | |
2961 that is, the line after the last line you got. | |
2962 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | |
2963 | |
2964 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | |
2965 send the current line together with the following line, when you send | |
2966 the following line. | |
2967 | |
2968 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | |
2969 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | |
2970 previously sent input. | |
2971 | |
2972 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | |
2973 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | |
2974 as the search string. | |
2975 | |
2976 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | |
2977 automatically in compilation-mode windows. | |
2978 | |
2979 ** C mode changes | |
2980 | |
2981 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | |
2982 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | |
2983 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | |
2984 definition. | |
2985 | |
2986 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | |
2987 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | |
2988 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | |
2989 style is still the default however. | |
2990 | |
2991 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | |
2992 | |
2993 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | |
2994 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | |
2995 them. They do not have key bindings by default. | |
2996 | |
2997 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | |
2998 and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | |
2999 | |
3000 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | |
3001 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | |
3002 | |
3003 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | |
3004 makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | |
3005 | |
3006 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | |
3007 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | |
3008 | |
3009 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | |
3010 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | |
3011 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | |
3012 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | |
3013 | |
3014 ** Changes to hippie-expand. | |
3015 | |
3016 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If | |
3017 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, | |
3018 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | |
3019 | |
3020 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | |
3021 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | |
3022 expanding dynamically. | |
3023 | |
3024 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | |
3025 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | |
3026 | |
3027 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | |
3028 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | |
3029 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | |
3030 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | |
3031 | |
3032 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | |
3033 | |
3034 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
3035 | |
3036 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | |
3037 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | |
3038 automatic key generation. This replaces variable | |
3039 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | |
3040 against the first word in the title. | |
3041 | |
3042 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | |
3043 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | |
3044 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | |
3045 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use | |
3046 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the | |
3047 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. | |
3048 | |
3049 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | |
3050 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | |
3051 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | |
3052 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | |
3053 | |
3054 ** Changes in vcursor.el. | |
3055 | |
3056 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | |
3057 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | |
3058 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | |
3059 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | |
3060 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | |
3061 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | |
3062 | |
3063 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | |
3064 Editing group once the package is loaded. | |
3065 | |
3066 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | |
3067 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | |
3068 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour. | |
3069 | |
3070 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | |
3071 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | |
3072 | |
3073 ** Ispell changes. | |
3074 | |
3075 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current | |
3076 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | |
3077 are identified by syntax tables in effect. | |
3078 | |
3079 *** Generic region skipping implemented. | |
3080 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | |
3081 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | |
3082 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | |
3083 include: | |
3084 | |
3085 o URLs are automatically skipped | |
3086 o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | |
3087 | |
3088 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | |
3089 | |
3090 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
3091 | |
3092 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | |
3093 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | |
3094 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | |
3095 section `Optimizations' in the manual. | |
3096 | |
3097 *** New recursive parser. | |
3098 | |
3099 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | |
3100 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | |
3101 recursive parser scans the individual files. | |
3102 | |
3103 *** Parsing only part of a document. | |
3104 | |
3105 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling | |
3106 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | |
3107 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | |
3108 | |
3109 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
3110 | |
3111 *** Storing parsing information in a file. | |
3112 | |
3113 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | |
3114 | |
3115 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
3116 | |
3117 *** Using multiple selection buffers | |
3118 | |
3119 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | |
3120 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | |
3121 | |
3122 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
3123 | |
3124 *** References to external documents. | |
3125 | |
3126 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | |
3127 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | |
3128 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | |
3129 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | |
3130 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | |
3131 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | |
3132 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | |
3133 | |
3134 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | |
3135 | |
3136 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, | |
3137 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. | |
3138 | |
3139 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | |
3140 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | |
3141 | |
3142 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | |
3143 | |
3144 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | |
3145 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | |
3146 | |
3147 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | |
3148 | |
3149 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | |
3150 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | |
3151 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | |
3152 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | |
3153 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | |
3154 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | |
3155 more. | |
3156 | |
3157 *** Support for the varioref package | |
3158 | |
3159 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | |
3160 | |
3161 *** New hooks | |
3162 | |
3163 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | |
3164 and citations are created. These hooks are | |
3165 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | |
3166 `reftex-format-cite-function'. | |
3167 | |
3168 *** Citations outside LaTeX | |
3169 | |
3170 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | |
3171 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | |
3172 | |
3173 *** Short context is no longer fontified. | |
3174 | |
3175 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | |
3176 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | |
3177 fontified, use | |
3178 | |
3179 (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | |
3180 | |
3181 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | |
3182 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | |
3183 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | |
3184 directories that contain the same file name. | |
3185 | |
3186 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | |
3187 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | |
3188 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | |
3189 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | |
3190 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | |
3191 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | |
3192 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | |
3193 directory. | |
3194 | |
3195 ** New modes and packages | |
3196 | |
3197 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | |
3198 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | |
3199 it, but some do not. | |
3200 | |
3201 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | |
3202 code. | |
3203 | |
3204 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | |
3205 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | |
3206 around in a buffer. | |
3207 | |
3208 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | |
3209 | |
3210 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | |
3211 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | |
3212 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | |
3213 established system of notation similar to Chess. | |
3214 | |
3215 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | |
3216 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | |
3217 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | |
3218 | |
3219 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | |
3220 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | |
3221 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of | |
3222 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | |
3223 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | |
3224 the like. | |
3225 | |
3226 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | |
3227 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | |
3228 | |
3229 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | |
3230 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | |
3231 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | |
3232 the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | |
3233 | |
3234 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | |
3235 | |
3236 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | |
3237 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | |
3238 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | |
3239 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | |
3240 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) | |
3241 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | |
3242 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | |
3243 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | |
3244 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | |
3245 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | |
3246 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | |
3247 | |
3248 Platform-specific modes: | |
3249 | |
3250 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | |
3251 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | |
3252 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | |
3253 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | |
3254 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | |
3255 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | |
3256 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | |
3257 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | |
3258 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | |
3259 | |
3260 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
3261 | |
3262 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | |
3263 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | |
3264 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | |
3265 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | |
3266 | |
3267 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | |
3268 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | |
3269 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
3270 | |
3271 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | |
3272 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | |
3273 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | |
3274 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | |
3275 | |
3276 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | |
3277 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | |
3278 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | |
3279 environment. | |
3280 | |
3281 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | |
3282 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | |
3283 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | |
3284 current input method for reading this one event. | |
3285 | |
3286 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | |
3287 now control whether to output certain characters as | |
3288 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | |
3289 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | |
3290 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | |
3291 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | |
3292 | |
3293 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
3294 | |
3295 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | |
3296 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | |
3297 | |
3298 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | |
3299 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | |
3300 always increases point by 1. | |
3301 | |
3302 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | |
3303 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | |
3304 | |
3305 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
3306 | |
3307 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | |
3308 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | |
3309 default value changed. For example, | |
3310 | |
3311 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | |
3312 :type 'integer | |
3313 :group 'foo | |
3314 :version "20.3") | |
3315 | |
3316 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." | |
3317 :version "20.3") | |
3318 | |
3319 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | |
3320 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | |
3321 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | |
3322 `:version' in the top level group. | |
3323 | |
3324 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | |
3325 | |
3326 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | |
3327 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | |
3328 | |
3329 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | |
3330 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | |
3331 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | |
3332 to themselves. | |
3333 | |
3334 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | |
3335 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | |
3336 values whatever. | |
3337 | |
3338 ** There is a new debugger command, R. | |
3339 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | |
3340 in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | |
3341 | |
3342 ** Frame-local variables. | |
3343 | |
3344 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | |
3345 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | |
3346 local bindings for that variable. | |
3347 | |
3348 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | |
3349 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | |
3350 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | |
3351 parameter name. | |
3352 | |
3353 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | |
3354 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | |
3355 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | |
3356 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | |
3357 | |
3358 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | |
3359 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | |
3360 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | |
3361 through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | |
3362 | |
3363 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | |
3364 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | |
3365 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | |
3366 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | |
3367 See the documentation in sregex.el. | |
3368 | |
3369 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | |
3370 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | |
3371 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | |
3372 The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | |
3373 | |
3374 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | |
3375 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | |
3376 | |
3377 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | |
3378 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | |
3379 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | |
3380 | |
3381 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | |
3382 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | |
3383 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | |
3384 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | |
3385 | |
3386 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | |
3387 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | |
3388 empty input. | |
3389 | |
3390 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | |
3391 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | |
3392 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | |
3393 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | |
3394 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | |
3395 | |
3396 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | |
3397 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | |
3398 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | |
3399 default password to use if the user enters nothing. | |
3400 | |
3401 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | |
3402 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | |
3403 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | |
3404 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | |
3405 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | |
3406 | |
3407 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | |
3408 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | |
3409 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | |
3410 end of the window, even if this requires computation. | |
3411 | |
3412 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | |
3413 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | |
3414 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | |
3415 | |
3416 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | |
3417 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | |
3418 was directed to display this buffer. | |
3419 | |
3420 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | |
3421 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | |
3422 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | |
3423 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | |
3424 set-window-configuration. | |
3425 | |
3426 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | |
3427 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | |
3428 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | |
3429 windows and the choice of buffers to display. | |
3430 | |
3431 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | |
3432 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | |
3433 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | |
3434 | |
3435 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | |
3436 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | |
3437 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | |
3438 | |
3439 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | |
3440 and it is meant to be set by major modes. | |
3441 | |
3442 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | |
3443 except that it discards all text properties from the result. | |
3444 | |
3445 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | |
3446 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | |
3447 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | |
3448 | |
3449 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | |
3450 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | |
3451 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | |
3452 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | |
3453 | |
3454 ** Menu changes | |
3455 | |
3456 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | |
3457 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | |
3458 better supported. | |
3459 | |
3460 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | |
3461 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | |
3462 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | |
3463 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | |
3464 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | |
3465 | |
3466 *** A new format for menu items is supported. | |
3467 | |
3468 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | |
3469 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | |
3470 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | |
3471 starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | |
3472 | |
3473 The format is: | |
3474 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | |
3475 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | |
3476 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | |
3477 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | |
3478 The supported properties include | |
3479 | |
3480 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
3481 item is enabled. | |
3482 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
3483 item should appear in the menu. | |
3484 :filter FILTER-FN | |
3485 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, | |
3486 which will be REAL-BINDING. | |
3487 It should return a binding to use instead. | |
3488 :keys DESCRIPTION | |
3489 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | |
3490 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with | |
3491 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. | |
3492 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | |
3493 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | |
3494 keyboard binding. | |
3495 :key-sequence nil | |
3496 This means that the command normally has no | |
3497 keyboard equivalent. | |
3498 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | |
3499 :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | |
3500 TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | |
3501 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | |
3502 value says whether this button is currently selected. | |
3503 | |
3504 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | |
3505 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | |
3506 | |
3507 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | |
3508 | |
3509 ** New event types | |
3510 | |
3511 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | |
3512 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | |
3513 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | |
3514 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | |
3515 | |
3516 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | |
3517 | |
3518 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
3519 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | |
3520 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | |
3521 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | |
3522 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | |
3523 forward, away from the user. | |
3524 | |
3525 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
3526 | |
3527 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | |
3528 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | |
3529 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | |
3530 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | |
3531 loaded into Emacs. The format is: | |
3532 | |
3533 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | |
3534 | |
3535 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
3536 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | |
3537 that were dragged and dropped. | |
3538 | |
3539 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
3540 | |
3541 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
3542 | |
3543 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | |
3544 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | |
3545 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | |
3546 | |
3547 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | |
3548 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | |
3549 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | |
3550 | |
3551 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | |
3552 in Emacs 19 and before. | |
3553 | |
3554 The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | |
3555 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | |
3556 | |
3557 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | |
3558 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | |
3559 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | |
3560 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | |
3561 | |
3562 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | |
3563 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | |
3564 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | |
3565 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | |
3566 will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | |
3567 | |
3568 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | |
3569 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | |
3570 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | |
3571 consistent with the new representation. | |
3572 | |
3573 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | |
3574 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | |
3575 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | |
3576 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
3577 | |
3578 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | |
3579 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | |
3580 using the table nonascii-translation-table. | |
3581 | |
3582 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | |
3583 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | |
3584 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
3585 | |
3586 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | |
3587 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | |
3588 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | |
3589 | |
3590 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
3591 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | |
3592 | |
3593 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
3594 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | |
3595 | |
3596 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | |
3597 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | |
3598 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | |
3599 You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | |
3600 | |
3601 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | |
3602 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | |
3603 | |
3604 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | |
3605 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | |
3606 buffer or string being searched. | |
3607 | |
3608 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | |
3609 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | |
3610 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | |
3611 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | |
3612 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | |
3613 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | |
3614 expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | |
3615 | |
3616 *** Structure of coding system changed. | |
3617 | |
3618 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | |
3619 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | |
3620 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | |
3621 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | |
3622 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | |
3623 your own alias name of a coding system by the function | |
3624 define-coding-system-alias. | |
3625 | |
3626 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | |
3627 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | |
3628 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | |
3629 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | |
3630 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | |
3631 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | |
3632 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | |
3633 `iso-8859-1'. | |
3634 | |
3635 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | |
3636 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | |
3637 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | |
3638 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | |
3639 | |
3640 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | |
3641 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | |
3642 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | |
3643 the other character sets and read it back correctly. | |
3644 | |
3645 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | |
3646 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | |
3647 This function requires a user interaction. | |
3648 | |
3649 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | |
3650 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | |
3651 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | |
3652 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | |
3653 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | |
3654 select-safe-coding-system. | |
3655 | |
3656 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | |
3657 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | |
3658 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | |
3659 was done. | |
3660 | |
3661 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | |
3662 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | |
3663 coding systems used by some specific language environment. | |
3664 | |
3665 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | |
3666 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | |
3667 characters are found, they now return a list of single element | |
3668 `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | |
3669 | |
3670 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | |
3671 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | |
3672 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | |
3673 converted. | |
3674 | |
3675 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | |
3676 coding system for communicating with other X clients. | |
3677 | |
3678 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | |
3679 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | |
3680 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | |
3681 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | |
3682 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | |
3683 range of characters. | |
3684 | |
3685 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | |
3686 Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | |
3687 | |
3688 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | |
3689 in the current buffer at position POS. | |
3690 | |
3691 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | |
3692 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | |
3693 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | |
3694 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | |
3695 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | |
3696 binding input-method-function to nil. | |
3697 | |
3698 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | |
3699 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | |
3700 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | |
3701 the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | |
3702 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | |
3703 | |
3704 The input method function is not called when reading the second and | |
3705 subsequent events of a key sequence. | |
3706 | |
3707 *** You can customize any language environment by using | |
3708 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | |
3709 | |
3710 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | |
3711 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | |
3712 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | |
3713 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | |
3714 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | |
3715 | |
3716 * Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
3717 | |
3718 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | |
3719 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | |
3720 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | |
3721 tree structure. | |
3722 | |
3723 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | |
3724 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | |
3725 | |
3726 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | |
3727 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | |
3728 in your .emacs file.) | |
3729 | |
3730 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | |
3731 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | |
3732 | |
3733 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | |
3734 This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | |
3735 | |
3736 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | |
3737 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | |
3738 kills the region. | |
3739 | |
3740 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | |
3741 delete the character before point, as usual. | |
3742 | |
3743 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | |
3744 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | |
3745 by setting search-highlight to nil.) | |
3746 | |
3747 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | |
3748 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | |
3749 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | |
3750 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | |
3751 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | |
3752 past.) | |
3753 | |
3754 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | |
3755 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | |
3756 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | |
3757 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | |
3758 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | |
3759 | |
3760 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | |
3761 and is an alias for it. | |
3762 | |
3763 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | |
3764 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | |
3765 | |
3766 ** Scrolling changes | |
3767 | |
3768 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | |
3769 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | |
3770 | |
3771 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | |
3772 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | |
3773 where it started. | |
3774 | |
3775 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | |
3776 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | |
3777 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | |
3778 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | |
3779 | |
3780 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | |
3781 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | |
3782 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | |
3783 recenters the window. | |
3784 | |
3785 ** International character set support (MULE) | |
3786 | |
3787 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | |
3788 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | |
3789 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | |
3790 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | |
3791 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | |
3792 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | |
3793 | |
3794 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | |
3795 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | |
3796 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | |
3797 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | |
3798 into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | |
3799 | |
3800 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | |
3801 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | |
3802 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | |
3803 language, to make it possible to type them. | |
3804 | |
3805 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | |
3806 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | |
3807 | |
3808 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | |
3809 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | |
3810 | |
3811 You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | |
3812 | |
3813 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | |
3814 | |
3815 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | |
3816 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | |
3817 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | |
3818 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | |
3819 characters for their work until they want to change. | |
3820 | |
3821 *** Input methods | |
3822 | |
3823 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | |
3824 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | |
3825 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | |
3826 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | |
3827 support several input methods. | |
3828 | |
3829 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | |
3830 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | |
3831 work. | |
3832 | |
3833 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | |
3834 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | |
3835 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | |
3836 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | |
3837 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | |
3838 letter. | |
3839 | |
3840 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | |
3841 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | |
3842 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | |
3843 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | |
3844 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | |
3845 | |
3846 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | |
3847 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | |
3848 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | |
3849 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | |
3850 | |
3851 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | |
3852 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | |
3853 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | |
3854 the first guess is wrong. | |
3855 | |
3856 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | |
3857 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | |
3858 | |
3859 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | |
3860 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | |
3861 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | |
3862 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | |
3863 | |
3864 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | |
3865 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | |
3866 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | |
3867 translate automatically to and from either one. | |
3868 | |
3869 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | |
3870 | |
3871 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | |
3872 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | |
3873 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | |
3874 what you want. | |
3875 | |
3876 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | |
3877 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | |
3878 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | |
3879 multibyte characters in that buffer. | |
3880 | |
3881 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | |
3882 character conversion as well. | |
3883 | |
3884 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | |
3885 | |
3886 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | |
3887 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | |
3888 requires using many fonts. | |
3889 | |
3890 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | |
3891 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | |
3892 | |
3893 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | |
3894 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | |
3895 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | |
3896 you would use a font. | |
3897 | |
3898 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | |
3899 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | |
3900 display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | |
3901 | |
3902 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | |
3903 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | |
3904 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height, | |
3905 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped, | |
3906 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil. | |
3907 | |
3908 *** Defining fontsets. | |
3909 | |
3910 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | |
3911 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | |
3912 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | |
3913 | |
3914 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | |
3915 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | |
3916 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | |
3917 standard fontset are created automatically. | |
3918 | |
3919 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | |
3920 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | |
3921 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | |
3922 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | |
3923 name is `fontset-startup'. | |
3924 | |
3925 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | |
3926 The resource value should have this form: | |
3927 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | |
3928 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | |
3929 * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | |
3930 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | |
3931 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | |
3932 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | |
3933 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | |
3934 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and | |
3935 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set. | |
3936 | |
3937 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | |
3938 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | |
3939 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | |
3940 | |
3941 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | |
3942 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | |
3943 following resource, | |
3944 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | |
3945 the font for ASCII is generated as below: | |
3946 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | |
3947 Here is the substitution rule: | |
3948 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | |
3949 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | |
3950 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | |
3951 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | |
3952 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | |
3953 | |
3954 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | |
3955 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | |
3956 that function explicitly to create a fontset. | |
3957 | |
3958 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | |
3959 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | |
3960 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | |
3961 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | |
3962 fontsets. | |
3963 | |
3964 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | |
3965 defaults for a particular choice of language. | |
3966 | |
3967 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | |
3968 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | |
3969 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | |
3970 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | |
3971 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | |
3972 system for new files that you create. | |
3973 | |
3974 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | |
3975 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | |
3976 whole Emacs session. | |
3977 | |
3978 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | |
3979 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | |
3980 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | |
3981 | |
3982 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | |
3983 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | |
3984 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | |
3985 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | |
3986 coding systems that Emacs supports. | |
3987 | |
3988 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | |
3989 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | |
3990 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | |
3991 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | |
3992 is used for *the immediately following command*. | |
3993 | |
3994 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | |
3995 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | |
3996 | |
3997 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | |
3998 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | |
3999 | |
4000 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET | |
4001 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. | |
4002 | |
4003 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | |
4004 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | |
4005 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | |
4006 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | |
4007 of the file. | |
4008 | |
4009 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | |
4010 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | |
4011 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | |
4012 translated into that character code. | |
4013 | |
4014 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | |
4015 various countries to support the languages of those countries. | |
4016 | |
4017 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | |
4018 | |
4019 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | |
4020 the coding system for keyboard input. | |
4021 | |
4022 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | |
4023 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | |
4024 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | |
4025 | |
4026 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | |
4027 | |
4028 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | |
4029 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | |
4030 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | |
4031 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | |
4032 designed to work with terminals. | |
4033 | |
4034 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | |
4035 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | |
4036 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | |
4037 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | |
4038 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | |
4039 in the corresponding buffer. | |
4040 | |
4041 By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | |
4042 | |
4043 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | |
4044 to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | |
4045 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | |
4046 | |
4047 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | |
4048 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | |
4049 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | |
4050 want to use. | |
4051 | |
4052 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | |
4053 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | |
4054 | |
4055 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | |
4056 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | |
4057 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | |
4058 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | |
4059 | |
4060 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | |
4061 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | |
4062 related information. | |
4063 | |
4064 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | |
4065 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | |
4066 scripts. | |
4067 | |
4068 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | |
4069 information about the support for a particular language. | |
4070 You specify the language as an argument. | |
4071 | |
4072 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | |
4073 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | |
4074 first dash. | |
4075 | |
4076 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | |
4077 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | |
4078 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | |
4079 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | |
4080 | |
4081 A alternativnyj (Russian) | |
4082 B big5 (Chinese) | |
4083 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | |
4084 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | |
4085 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | |
4086 E euc-japan (Japanese) | |
4087 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
4088 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | |
4089 K euc-korea (Korean) | |
4090 R koi8 (Russian) | |
4091 Q tibetan | |
4092 S shift_jis (Japanese) | |
4093 T lao | |
4094 T tis620 (Thai) | |
4095 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | |
4096 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
4097 k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | |
4098 v viqr (Vietnamese) | |
4099 z hz (Chinese) | |
4100 | |
4101 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | |
4102 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | |
4103 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | |
4104 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | |
4105 | |
4106 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | |
4107 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | |
4108 | |
4109 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | |
4110 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | |
4111 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | |
4112 Rmail files themselves. | |
4113 | |
4114 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | |
4115 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | |
4116 | |
4117 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | |
4118 for sending mail: | |
4119 | |
4120 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | |
4121 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | |
4122 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | |
4123 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | |
4124 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | |
4125 | |
4126 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | |
4127 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | |
4128 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | |
4129 translations. | |
4130 | |
4131 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | |
4132 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | |
4133 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | |
4134 without any conversion. | |
4135 | |
4136 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | |
4137 You can now specify any number of octal digits. | |
4138 RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | |
4139 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | |
4140 | |
4141 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | |
4142 functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | |
4143 | |
4144 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | |
4145 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | |
4146 | |
4147 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | |
4148 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | |
4149 | |
4150 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | |
4151 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | |
4152 in the buffer before point. | |
4153 | |
4154 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | |
4155 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | |
4156 you are using. | |
4157 | |
4158 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | |
4159 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | |
4160 | |
4161 ** File locking works with NFS now. | |
4162 | |
4163 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | |
4164 in the same directory as FILENAME. | |
4165 | |
4166 This means that collision detection between two different machines now | |
4167 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | |
4168 can become a bottleneck. | |
4169 | |
4170 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | |
4171 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | |
4172 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | |
4173 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | |
4174 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | |
4175 so useful that the change is worth while. | |
4176 | |
4177 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | |
4178 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | |
4179 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | |
4180 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | |
4181 | |
4182 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | |
4183 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | |
4184 show-paren-mode. | |
4185 | |
4186 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | |
4187 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
4188 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | |
4189 | |
4190 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | |
4191 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
4192 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | |
4193 | |
4194 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | |
4195 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | |
4196 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | |
4197 | |
4198 ** Changes in View mode. | |
4199 | |
4200 *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | |
4201 Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | |
4202 | |
4203 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | |
4204 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | |
4205 | |
4206 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | |
4207 previous state. | |
4208 | |
4209 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | |
4210 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | |
4211 | |
4212 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | |
4213 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | |
4214 not just the selected window. | |
4215 | |
4216 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | |
4217 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | |
4218 turns View mode on or off. | |
4219 | |
4220 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | |
4221 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | |
4222 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | |
4223 | |
4224 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | |
4225 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | |
4226 | |
4227 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | |
4228 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | |
4229 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | |
4230 which version to compare with. | |
4231 | |
4232 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | |
4233 blocks if a match is inside the block. | |
4234 | |
4235 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | |
4236 is outside the block. By customizing the variable | |
4237 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | |
4238 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | |
4239 | |
4240 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | |
4241 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | |
4242 blocks, all of them or none. | |
4243 | |
4244 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | |
4245 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | |
4246 confirmation first. | |
4247 | |
4248 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | |
4249 now changes the major mode according to that file name. | |
4250 However, the mode will not be changed if | |
4251 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | |
4252 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | |
4253 not suitable for ordinary files, or | |
4254 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | |
4255 | |
4256 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | |
4257 | |
4258 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | |
4259 these commands do not change the major mode. | |
4260 | |
4261 ** M-x occur changes. | |
4262 | |
4263 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | |
4264 it performs a case-sensitive search. | |
4265 | |
4266 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | |
4267 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | |
4268 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | |
4269 | |
4270 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | |
4271 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | |
4272 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | |
4273 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | |
4274 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | |
4275 | |
4276 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | |
4277 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | |
4278 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | |
4279 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | |
4280 | |
4281 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
4282 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | |
4283 buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | |
4284 | |
4285 ** Outline mode changes. | |
4286 | |
4287 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | |
4288 | |
4289 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | |
4290 | |
4291 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | |
4292 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | |
4293 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | |
4294 was already active. | |
4295 | |
4296 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | |
4297 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | |
4298 get confused by it. | |
4299 | |
4300 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | |
4301 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | |
4302 | |
4303 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | |
4304 | |
4305 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
4306 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | |
4307 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | |
4308 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | |
4309 | |
4310 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | |
4311 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | |
4312 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | |
4313 | |
4314 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | |
4315 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | |
4316 values. | |
4317 | |
4318 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | |
4319 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | |
4320 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | |
4321 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | |
4322 | |
4323 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | |
4324 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | |
4325 can be. The default value is 30. | |
4326 | |
4327 ** Changes in Mail mode. | |
4328 | |
4329 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | |
4330 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | |
4331 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | |
4332 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | |
4333 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | |
4334 behavior. | |
4335 | |
4336 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | |
4337 compose-mail-other-frame. | |
4338 | |
4339 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | |
4340 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | |
4341 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | |
4342 buffer that shows the original message. | |
4343 | |
4344 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | |
4345 with separator lines around the contents. | |
4346 | |
4347 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | |
4348 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | |
4349 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | |
4350 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | |
4351 | |
4352 *** New features in the mail-complete command. | |
4353 | |
4354 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | |
4355 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | |
4356 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | |
4357 Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | |
4358 | |
4359 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | |
4360 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | |
4361 /etc/passwd. | |
4362 | |
4363 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | |
4364 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | |
4365 /etc/passwd. | |
4366 | |
4367 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | |
4368 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | |
4369 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | |
4370 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | |
4371 | |
4372 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | |
4373 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | |
4374 be taken to be magic. | |
4375 | |
4376 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | |
4377 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | |
4378 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | |
4379 | |
4380 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | |
4381 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | |
4382 | |
4383 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | |
4384 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | |
4385 | |
4386 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | |
4387 | |
4388 new key dired.el binding old key | |
4389 ------- ---------------- ------- | |
4390 * c dired-change-marks c | |
4391 * m dired-mark m | |
4392 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | |
4393 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | |
4394 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | |
4395 * u dired-unmark u | |
4396 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | |
4397 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-? | |
4398 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks | |
4399 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | |
4400 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | |
4401 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | |
4402 | |
4403 ** Rmail changes. | |
4404 | |
4405 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | |
4406 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | |
4407 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | |
4408 each time you run it. | |
4409 | |
4410 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | |
4411 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | |
4412 | |
4413 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | |
4414 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | |
4415 means to move in the opposite direction. | |
4416 | |
4417 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | |
4418 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | |
4419 | |
4420 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | |
4421 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | |
4422 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | |
4423 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | |
4424 for output. | |
4425 | |
4426 ** Gnus changes. | |
4427 | |
4428 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | |
4429 | |
4430 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into | |
4431 Gnus. | |
4432 | |
4433 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like | |
4434 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. | |
4435 | |
4436 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | |
4437 article mode line. | |
4438 | |
4439 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | |
4440 | |
4441 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | |
4442 | |
4443 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | |
4444 | |
4445 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | |
4446 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | |
4447 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | |
4448 | |
4449 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | |
4450 | |
4451 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | |
4452 | |
4453 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | |
4454 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | |
4455 | |
4456 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | |
4457 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | |
4458 used to pick articles. | |
4459 | |
4460 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | |
4461 another have been added. | |
4462 | |
4463 `M-x gnus-change-server' | |
4464 | |
4465 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | |
4466 generating lines in buffers. | |
4467 | |
4468 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | |
4469 `M-C-_'. | |
4470 | |
4471 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | |
4472 | |
4473 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | |
4474 | |
4475 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | |
4476 | |
4477 *** Scores can be decayed. | |
4478 | |
4479 (setq gnus-decay-scores t) | |
4480 | |
4481 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | |
4482 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | |
4483 | |
4484 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | |
4485 the native server. | |
4486 | |
4487 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | |
4488 | |
4489 *** A new command for reading collections of documents | |
4490 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'. | |
4491 | |
4492 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | |
4493 | |
4494 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | |
4495 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | |
4496 | |
4497 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | |
4498 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | |
4499 | |
4500 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | |
4501 a group. | |
4502 | |
4503 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | |
4504 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | |
4505 | |
4506 See the commands under the `T S' submap. | |
4507 | |
4508 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | |
4509 | |
4510 See the commands under the `G P' submap. | |
4511 | |
4512 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | |
4513 | |
4514 Use the `Y c' command. | |
4515 | |
4516 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | |
4517 | |
4518 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | |
4519 | |
4520 `M-x nnmail-split-history' | |
4521 | |
4522 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | |
4523 from incoming mail before saving the mail. | |
4524 | |
4525 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. | |
4526 | |
4527 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | |
4528 | |
4529 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | |
4530 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | |
4531 | |
4532 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | |
4533 | |
4534 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | |
4535 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | |
4536 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | |
4537 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | |
4538 this issue.) | |
4539 | |
4540 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | |
4541 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | |
4542 particular news group. This can be done by: | |
4543 | |
4544 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | |
4545 | |
4546 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | |
4547 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | |
4548 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | |
4549 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | |
4550 for reading and posting). | |
4551 | |
4552 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | |
4553 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
4554 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | |
4555 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | |
4556 there. | |
4557 | |
4558 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | |
4559 default. Here are some of these default settings: | |
4560 | |
4561 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | |
4562 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
4563 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
4564 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | |
4565 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | |
4566 | |
4567 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | |
4568 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | |
4569 | |
4570 ** CC mode changes. | |
4571 | |
4572 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | |
4573 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | |
4574 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | |
4575 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | |
4576 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | |
4577 loaded. | |
4578 | |
4579 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | |
4580 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode | |
4581 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers | |
4582 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set | |
4583 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | |
4584 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. | |
4585 | |
4586 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | |
4587 of the current buffer. | |
4588 | |
4589 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | |
4590 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | |
4591 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | |
4592 | |
4593 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | |
4594 style that the Python developers like. | |
4595 | |
4596 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | |
4597 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | |
4598 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | |
4599 | |
4600 ** VC Changes [new] | |
4601 | |
4602 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot | |
4603 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current | |
4604 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | |
4605 | |
4606 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | |
4607 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | |
4608 developers. | |
4609 | |
4610 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | |
4611 RET in a buffer visiting that file. | |
4612 | |
4613 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | |
4614 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | |
4615 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | |
4616 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | |
4617 | |
4618 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | |
4619 version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | |
4620 | |
4621 ** Calendar changes. | |
4622 | |
4623 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses | |
4624 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this | |
4625 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years. | |
4626 | |
4627 ** ps-print changes | |
4628 | |
4629 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout. | |
4630 | |
4631 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns | |
4632 | |
4633 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print | |
4634 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols: | |
4635 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid' | |
4636 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5' | |
4637 It defaults to `letter'. | |
4638 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'. | |
4639 | |
4640 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation | |
4641 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode, | |
4642 non-nil means "landscape" mode. | |
4643 | |
4644 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer. | |
4645 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode. | |
4646 It defaults to 1. | |
4647 | |
4648 *** Horizontal layout | |
4649 | |
4650 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables | |
4651 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'. | |
4652 All are measured in points. | |
4653 | |
4654 *** Vertical layout | |
4655 | |
4656 The vertical layout is determined by the variables | |
4657 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'. | |
4658 All are measured in points. | |
4659 | |
4660 *** Headers | |
4661 | |
4662 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then | |
4663 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the | |
4664 margin above the text. | |
4665 | |
4666 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy | |
4667 framing box is printed around the header. | |
4668 | |
4669 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines', | |
4670 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'. | |
4671 | |
4672 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad', | |
4673 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and | |
4674 `ps-header-font-size'. | |
4675 | |
4676 *** Font managing | |
4677 | |
4678 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be | |
4679 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist | |
4680 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding | |
4681 elements to this alist. | |
4682 | |
4683 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font | |
4684 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points. | |
4685 | |
4686 ** hideshow changes. | |
4687 | |
4688 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | |
4689 C++, ; for lisp). | |
4690 | |
4691 *** Support for java-mode added. | |
4692 | |
4693 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | |
4694 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | |
4695 | |
4696 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at | |
4697 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your | |
4698 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | |
4699 | |
4700 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | |
4701 robust and a lot faster. | |
4702 | |
4703 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. | |
4704 | |
4705 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | |
4706 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | |
4707 documentation for more details. | |
4708 | |
4709 ** Changes in Enriched mode. | |
4710 | |
4711 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | |
4712 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | |
4713 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | |
4714 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | |
4715 the next time unless the fill-column is different. | |
4716 | |
4717 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | |
4718 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | |
4719 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | |
4720 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | |
4721 | |
4722 ** Font Lock mode | |
4723 | |
4724 *** Custom support | |
4725 | |
4726 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | |
4727 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the | |
4728 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom | |
4729 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in | |
4730 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | |
4731 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | |
4732 | |
4733 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | |
4734 | |
4735 *** Maximum decoration | |
4736 | |
4737 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | |
4738 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | |
4739 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | |
4740 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | |
4741 to get the old behavior. | |
4742 | |
4743 *** New support | |
4744 | |
4745 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | |
4746 | |
4747 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | |
4748 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | |
4749 | |
4750 *** Configurable support | |
4751 | |
4752 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | |
4753 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | |
4754 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | |
4755 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | |
4756 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | |
4757 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | |
4758 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | |
4759 | |
4760 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | |
4761 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | |
4762 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | |
4763 | |
4764 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | |
4765 | |
4766 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | |
4767 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | |
4768 for any mode. | |
4769 | |
4770 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | |
4771 | |
4772 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | |
4773 | |
4774 in your ~/.emacs. | |
4775 | |
4776 *** New faces | |
4777 | |
4778 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | |
4779 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | |
4780 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | |
4781 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | |
4782 | |
4783 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | |
4784 | |
4785 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | |
4786 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | |
4787 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | |
4788 | |
4789 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | |
4790 | |
4791 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | |
4792 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | |
4793 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | |
4794 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | |
4795 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | |
4796 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | |
4797 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. | |
4798 | |
4799 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | |
4800 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | |
4801 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | |
4802 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | |
4803 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | |
4804 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | |
4805 | |
4806 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | |
4807 | |
4808 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | |
4809 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | |
4810 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | |
4811 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | |
4812 | |
4813 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | |
4814 settings. | |
4815 | |
4816 ** Ada mode changes. | |
4817 | |
4818 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | |
4819 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | |
4820 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | |
4821 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | |
4822 stubs. | |
4823 | |
4824 *** There are two new commands: | |
4825 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | |
4826 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | |
4827 | |
4828 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | |
4829 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | |
4830 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. | |
4831 | |
4832 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | |
4833 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | |
4834 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | |
4835 | |
4836 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | |
4837 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | |
4838 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | |
4839 space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | |
4840 | |
4841 ** Scheme mode changes. | |
4842 | |
4843 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | |
4844 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | |
4845 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | |
4846 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | |
4847 have any effect. | |
4848 | |
4849 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | |
4850 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | |
4851 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | |
4852 variables as buffer-local variables. | |
4853 | |
4854 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | |
4855 Use M-x dsssl-mode. | |
4856 | |
4857 ** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells | |
4858 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the | |
4859 buffer in Emacs. | |
4860 | |
4861 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area | |
4862 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | |
4863 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | |
4864 | |
4865 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | |
4866 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | |
4867 the current defun. | |
4868 | |
4869 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | |
4870 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | |
4871 | |
4872 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | |
4873 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | |
4874 necessary). | |
4875 | |
4876 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | |
4877 if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | |
4878 these register values no longer become completely useless. | |
4879 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | |
4880 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | |
4881 it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | |
4882 | |
4883 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | |
4884 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | |
4885 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | |
4886 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | |
4887 | |
4888 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | |
4889 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | |
4890 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | |
4891 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | |
4892 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | |
4893 | |
4894 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | |
4895 since it applies only to the current frame. | |
4896 | |
4897 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | |
4898 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | |
4899 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | |
4900 | |
4901 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | |
4902 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | |
4903 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | |
4904 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | |
4905 instead of just the file you are editing. | |
4906 | |
4907 ** RefTeX mode | |
4908 | |
4909 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | |
4910 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | |
4911 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | |
4912 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | |
4913 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | |
4914 | |
4915 C-c ( reftex-label | |
4916 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and | |
4917 knows which kind of label is needed. | |
4918 | |
4919 C-c ) reftex-reference | |
4920 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | |
4921 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | |
4922 | |
4923 C-c [ reftex-citation | |
4924 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | |
4925 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | |
4926 | |
4927 C-c & reftex-view-crossref | |
4928 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | |
4929 | |
4930 C-c = reftex-toc | |
4931 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | |
4932 can quickly jump to every section. | |
4933 | |
4934 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional | |
4935 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | |
4936 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | |
4937 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | |
4938 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | |
4939 | |
4940 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
4941 | |
4942 *** Info documentation is now available. | |
4943 | |
4944 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | |
4945 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | |
4946 | |
4947 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | |
4948 bibtex-user-optional-fields. | |
4949 | |
4950 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | |
4951 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | |
4952 | |
4953 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | |
4954 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | |
4955 appropriate functions. | |
4956 | |
4957 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | |
4958 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h. | |
4959 | |
4960 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | |
4961 been cleaned. | |
4962 | |
4963 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | |
4964 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | |
4965 | |
4966 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | |
4967 shall be delimited. | |
4968 | |
4969 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | |
4970 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | |
4971 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | |
4972 | |
4973 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | |
4974 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | |
4975 prefixed with `ALT'. | |
4976 | |
4977 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | |
4978 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | |
4979 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | |
4980 documentation). | |
4981 | |
4982 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | |
4983 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | |
4984 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | |
4985 | |
4986 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | |
4987 comma should be inserted at end of last field. | |
4988 | |
4989 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | |
4990 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | |
4991 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | |
4992 | |
4993 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | |
4994 | |
4995 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | |
4996 | |
4997 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | |
4998 from alien sources. | |
4999 | |
5000 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | |
5001 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | |
5002 crossref entries. | |
5003 | |
5004 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | |
5005 region. | |
5006 | |
5007 *** Added support for imenu. | |
5008 | |
5009 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | |
5010 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | |
5011 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | |
5012 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | |
5013 | |
5014 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | |
5015 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | |
5016 | |
5017 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | |
5018 | |
5019 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the | |
5020 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | |
5021 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | |
5022 as an argument. | |
5023 | |
5024 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | |
5025 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | |
5026 | |
5027 ** browse-url changes | |
5028 | |
5029 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | |
5030 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | |
5031 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | |
5032 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | |
5033 customization variables. | |
5034 | |
5035 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | |
5036 | |
5037 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | |
5038 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | |
5039 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | |
5040 | |
5041 ** Changes in Ediff | |
5042 | |
5043 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | |
5044 pops up the Info file for this command. | |
5045 | |
5046 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | |
5047 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | |
5048 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | |
5049 directories). | |
5050 | |
5051 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | |
5052 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | |
5053 files in the same directory. | |
5054 | |
5055 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | |
5056 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | |
5057 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | |
5058 | |
5059 ** Changes in Viper | |
5060 | |
5061 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | |
5062 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- | |
5063 instead of vip-. | |
5064 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | |
5065 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next | |
5066 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. | |
5067 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | |
5068 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | |
5069 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | |
5070 color when Viper is in insert state. | |
5071 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | |
5072 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | |
5073 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | |
5074 | |
5075 ** Etags changes. | |
5076 | |
5077 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | |
5078 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | |
5079 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | |
5080 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | |
5081 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | |
5082 | |
5083 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | |
5084 | |
5085 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | |
5086 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. | |
5087 | |
5088 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | |
5089 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | |
5090 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | |
5091 | |
5092 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | |
5093 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | |
5094 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | |
5095 methods and protocols. | |
5096 | |
5097 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension | |
5098 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | |
5099 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | |
5100 paragraph name. | |
5101 | |
5102 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | |
5103 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | |
5104 at least M times and as many as N times. | |
5105 | |
5106 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | |
5107 in files has changed slightly. | |
5108 | |
5109 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | |
5110 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | |
5111 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | |
5112 with old time-stamp-format values. | |
5113 | |
5114 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | |
5115 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | |
5116 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | |
5117 reasons. | |
5118 | |
5119 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | |
5120 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | |
5121 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | |
5122 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | |
5123 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | |
5124 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | |
5125 | |
5126 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | |
5127 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | |
5128 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | |
5129 | |
5130 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | |
5131 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | |
5132 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | |
5133 recommended now will continue to work then. | |
5134 | |
5135 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | |
5136 details. | |
5137 | |
5138 ** There are some additional major modes: | |
5139 | |
5140 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | |
5141 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | |
5142 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | |
5143 | |
5144 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | |
5145 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | |
5146 into Emacs. | |
5147 | |
5148 ** New Lisp packages include: | |
5149 | |
5150 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | |
5151 | |
5152 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | |
5153 be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | |
5154 | |
5155 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | |
5156 | |
5157 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | |
5158 in shell buffers. | |
5159 | |
5160 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | |
5161 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | |
5162 and `elint-defun'. | |
5163 | |
5164 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | |
5165 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | |
5166 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | |
5167 strings or comments. | |
5168 | |
5169 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | |
5170 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | |
5171 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | |
5172 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | |
5173 at these points. | |
5174 | |
5175 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | |
5176 can visit them by short forms of their names. | |
5177 | |
5178 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | |
5179 Emacs Lisp function at point. | |
5180 | |
5181 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | |
5182 | |
5183 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | |
5184 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | |
5185 | |
5186 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | |
5187 | |
5188 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | |
5189 | |
5190 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | |
5191 | |
5192 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | |
5193 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | |
5194 | |
5195 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | |
5196 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | |
5197 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | |
5198 original place after inserting the copy. | |
5199 | |
5200 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | |
5201 on the buffer. | |
5202 | |
5203 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | |
5204 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | |
5205 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | |
5206 | |
5207 Enable mouse-drag with: | |
5208 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | |
5209 -or- | |
5210 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | |
5211 | |
5212 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | |
5213 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | |
5214 | |
5215 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | |
5216 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | |
5217 | |
5218 *** ogonek | |
5219 | |
5220 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | |
5221 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | |
5222 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | |
5223 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | |
5224 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | |
5225 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | |
5226 instance) and vice versa. | |
5227 | |
5228 To use this package load it using | |
5229 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | |
5230 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | |
5231 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish | |
5232 M-x ogonek-how -- in English | |
5233 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | |
5234 ways of customization in `.emacs'. | |
5235 | |
5236 *** Interface to ph. | |
5237 | |
5238 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | |
5239 | |
5240 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | |
5241 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | |
5242 these servers. | |
5243 | |
5244 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | |
5245 | |
5246 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | |
5247 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | |
5248 while the real cursor does not move. | |
5249 | |
5250 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | |
5251 for visiting your favorite web sites. | |
5252 | |
5253 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | |
5254 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | |
5255 | |
5256 ** movemail change | |
5257 | |
5258 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | |
5259 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | |
5260 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | |
5261 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | |
5262 | |
5263 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | |
5264 | |
5265 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. | |
5266 | |
5267 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | |
5268 | |
5269 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | |
5270 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | |
5271 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | |
5272 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | |
5273 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | |
5274 | |
5275 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | |
5276 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | |
5277 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | |
5278 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | |
5279 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | |
5280 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | |
5281 | |
5282 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
5283 | |
5284 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | |
5285 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | |
5286 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | |
5287 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | |
5288 | |
5289 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | |
5290 to start with w32- instead of win32-. | |
5291 | |
5292 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | |
5293 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | |
5294 "win". | |
5295 | |
5296 ** Basic Lisp changes | |
5297 | |
5298 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | |
5299 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | |
5300 | |
5301 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | |
5302 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | |
5303 or by the user. | |
5304 | |
5305 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | |
5306 | |
5307 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | |
5308 | |
5309 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | |
5310 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | |
5311 | |
5312 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | |
5313 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | |
5314 its argument. | |
5315 | |
5316 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | |
5317 | |
5318 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | |
5319 | |
5320 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | |
5321 | |
5322 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | |
5323 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | |
5324 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | |
5325 `format' function. | |
5326 | |
5327 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | |
5328 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | |
5329 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | |
5330 | |
5331 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | |
5332 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | |
5333 adding one of these suffixes. | |
5334 | |
5335 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | |
5336 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | |
5337 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. | |
5338 | |
5339 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | |
5340 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | |
5341 | |
5342 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | |
5343 | |
5344 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | |
5345 You must load the `cl' library to define it. | |
5346 | |
5347 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | |
5348 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | |
5349 | |
5350 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | |
5351 | |
5352 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | |
5353 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | |
5354 | |
5355 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | |
5356 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | |
5357 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | |
5358 works using `save-current-buffer'. | |
5359 | |
5360 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | |
5361 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | |
5362 of the last form. | |
5363 | |
5364 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | |
5365 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | |
5366 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | |
5367 as the last form. | |
5368 | |
5369 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | |
5370 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | |
5371 matches. | |
5372 | |
5373 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | |
5374 | |
5375 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | |
5376 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | |
5377 Then it returns that string. | |
5378 | |
5379 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | |
5380 | |
5381 (with-output-to-string | |
5382 (princ "The buffer is ") | |
5383 (princ (buffer-name))) | |
5384 | |
5385 returns "The buffer is foo". | |
5386 | |
5387 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | |
5388 is non-nil. | |
5389 | |
5390 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | |
5391 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | |
5392 characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | |
5393 | |
5394 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | |
5395 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | |
5396 | |
5397 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | |
5398 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | |
5399 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | |
5400 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | |
5401 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | |
5402 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | |
5403 | |
5404 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | |
5405 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | |
5406 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | |
5407 characters". | |
5408 | |
5409 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | |
5410 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | |
5411 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | |
5412 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | |
5413 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | |
5414 | |
5415 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | |
5416 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | |
5417 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | |
5418 character, which may be more than one buffer position. | |
5419 | |
5420 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | |
5421 always one buffer position, need to be changed. | |
5422 | |
5423 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | |
5424 | |
5425 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, | |
5426 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | |
5427 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | |
5428 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | |
5429 guaranteed. | |
5430 | |
5431 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | |
5432 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | |
5433 character). | |
5434 | |
5435 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | |
5436 | |
5437 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | |
5438 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | |
5439 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | |
5440 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | |
5441 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | |
5442 | |
5443 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | |
5444 | |
5445 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | |
5446 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | |
5447 more than the number of characters. | |
5448 | |
5449 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | |
5450 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | |
5451 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | |
5452 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | |
5453 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | |
5454 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | |
5455 | |
5456 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | |
5457 and returns a string containing those characters. | |
5458 | |
5459 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | |
5460 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | |
5461 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | |
5462 character, sref signals an error. | |
5463 | |
5464 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | |
5465 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | |
5466 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
5467 | |
5468 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | |
5469 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | |
5470 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
5471 | |
5472 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | |
5473 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | |
5474 to a vector of the characters in it. | |
5475 | |
5476 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | |
5477 of a string. You call it as follows: | |
5478 | |
5479 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | |
5480 | |
5481 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | |
5482 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | |
5483 This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | |
5484 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | |
5485 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | |
5486 | |
5487 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | |
5488 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
5489 | |
5490 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | |
5491 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
5492 | |
5493 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | |
5494 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | |
5495 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | |
5496 which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | |
5497 | |
5498 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | |
5499 | |
5500 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | |
5501 | |
5502 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | |
5503 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | |
5504 are not included in the resulting value. | |
5505 | |
5506 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | |
5507 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | |
5508 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | |
5509 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | |
5510 | |
5511 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | |
5512 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | |
5513 character extends across that column), then the padding character | |
5514 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | |
5515 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | |
5516 column START-COLUMN. | |
5517 | |
5518 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | |
5519 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | |
5520 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | |
5521 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | |
5522 changed text, before the change. | |
5523 | |
5524 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | |
5525 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | |
5526 one character set for each script, not for each language. | |
5527 | |
5528 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | |
5529 | |
5530 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | |
5531 | |
5532 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | |
5533 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | |
5534 | |
5535 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | |
5536 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | |
5537 which identify the character within that character set. | |
5538 | |
5539 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | |
5540 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | |
5541 opposite of split-char. | |
5542 | |
5543 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | |
5544 of all the characters between BEG and END. | |
5545 | |
5546 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | |
5547 of all the characters in a string. | |
5548 | |
5549 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | |
5550 and specifying coding systems. | |
5551 | |
5552 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | |
5553 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | |
5554 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | |
5555 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | |
5556 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | |
5557 as what to do about code conversion.) | |
5558 | |
5559 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | |
5560 name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | |
5561 | |
5562 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
5563 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
5564 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | |
5565 | |
5566 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
5567 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | |
5568 to match against a file name. | |
5569 | |
5570 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
5571 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
5572 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
5573 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
5574 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
5575 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
5576 | |
5577 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
5578 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
5579 | |
5580 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | |
5581 the coding system to use for network sockets. | |
5582 | |
5583 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
5584 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | |
5585 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | |
5586 service names. | |
5587 | |
5588 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
5589 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
5590 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
5591 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
5592 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
5593 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
5594 | |
5595 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
5596 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
5597 | |
5598 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
5599 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
5600 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | |
5601 start the subprocess. | |
5602 | |
5603 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | |
5604 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | |
5605 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | |
5606 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | |
5607 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | |
5608 | |
5609 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | |
5610 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | |
5611 subprocess. | |
5612 | |
5613 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | |
5614 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | |
5615 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | |
5616 connection permanently or until overridden. | |
5617 | |
5618 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | |
5619 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | |
5620 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | |
5621 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | |
5622 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | |
5623 system for one operation at a time. | |
5624 | |
5625 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | |
5626 files, subprocesses or network connections. | |
5627 | |
5628 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | |
5629 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | |
5630 The value is a cons cell, | |
5631 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
5632 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | |
5633 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | |
5634 input to the subprocess. | |
5635 | |
5636 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | |
5637 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | |
5638 | |
5639 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | |
5640 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | |
5641 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | |
5642 | |
5643 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | |
5644 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | |
5645 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | |
5646 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | |
5647 customization. | |
5648 | |
5649 Thus, instead of writing | |
5650 | |
5651 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | |
5652 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | |
5653 | |
5654 you would now write this: | |
5655 | |
5656 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | |
5657 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | |
5658 :type 'boolean | |
5659 :group foo) | |
5660 | |
5661 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | |
5662 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | |
5663 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | |
5664 for a description of them. | |
5665 | |
5666 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | |
5667 should belong to. You define a new group like this: | |
5668 | |
5669 (defgroup ispell nil | |
5670 "Spell checking using Ispell." | |
5671 :group 'processes) | |
5672 | |
5673 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | |
5674 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | |
5675 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | |
5676 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | |
5677 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | |
5678 | |
5679 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | |
5680 package should have just one group; a more complex package should | |
5681 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | |
5682 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | |
5683 first-level subgroups. | |
5684 | |
5685 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | |
5686 | |
5687 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | |
5688 separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | |
5689 | |
5690 ** easy-mmode | |
5691 | |
5692 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | |
5693 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | |
5694 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | |
5695 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | |
5696 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | |
5697 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | |
5698 | |
5699 ** Text property changes | |
5700 | |
5701 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | |
5702 text property. | |
5703 | |
5704 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | |
5705 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | |
5706 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | |
5707 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | |
5708 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | |
5709 | |
5710 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | |
5711 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | |
5712 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | |
5713 position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | |
5714 | |
5715 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | |
5716 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | |
5717 is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | |
5718 | |
5719 ** Changes in invisibility features | |
5720 | |
5721 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | |
5722 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | |
5723 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | |
5724 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | |
5725 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | |
5726 make the overlay visible. | |
5727 | |
5728 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | |
5729 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | |
5730 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | |
5731 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | |
5732 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | |
5733 t when it should hide it. | |
5734 | |
5735 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | |
5736 | |
5737 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | |
5738 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) | |
5739 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | |
5740 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to | |
5741 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. | |
5742 Here is an example of how to do this: | |
5743 | |
5744 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | |
5745 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
5746 ;; If you don't want ellipsis: | |
5747 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
5748 | |
5749 ... | |
5750 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | |
5751 | |
5752 ... | |
5753 ;; When done with the overlays: | |
5754 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
5755 ;; Or respectively: | |
5756 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
5757 | |
5758 ** Changes in syntax parsing. | |
5759 | |
5760 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | |
5761 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | |
5762 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | |
5763 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | |
5764 | |
5765 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | |
5766 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | |
5767 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | |
5768 | |
5769 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | |
5770 character in the buffer is calculated thus: | |
5771 | |
5772 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | |
5773 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | |
5774 | |
5775 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | |
5776 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | |
5777 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | |
5778 | |
5779 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | |
5780 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | |
5781 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | |
5782 determine the syntax type of the character. | |
5783 | |
5784 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | |
5785 of the current buffer. | |
5786 | |
5787 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | |
5788 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | |
5789 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | |
5790 | |
5791 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | |
5792 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | |
5793 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | |
5794 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | |
5795 another character with the same code (unless quoted). | |
5796 | |
5797 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | |
5798 text property. | |
5799 | |
5800 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | |
5801 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | |
5802 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | |
5803 | |
5804 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | |
5805 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | |
5806 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | |
5807 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | |
5808 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | |
5809 | |
5810 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | |
5811 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | |
5812 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | |
5813 | |
5814 ** Changes in face features | |
5815 | |
5816 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | |
5817 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | |
5818 | |
5819 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | |
5820 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | |
5821 | |
5822 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | |
5823 set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | |
5824 | |
5825 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | |
5826 set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | |
5827 | |
5828 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | |
5829 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | |
5830 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | |
5831 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | |
5832 overlay property). | |
5833 | |
5834 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | |
5835 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | |
5836 | |
5837 ** Changes in file-handling functions | |
5838 | |
5839 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | |
5840 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | |
5841 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | |
5842 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | |
5843 | |
5844 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | |
5845 begins with ~. | |
5846 | |
5847 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | |
5848 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | |
5849 | |
5850 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
5851 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | |
5852 | |
5853 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | |
5854 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | |
5855 | |
5856 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | |
5857 character code conversion as well as other things. | |
5858 | |
5859 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | |
5860 (formerly it did not). | |
5861 | |
5862 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | |
5863 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | |
5864 | |
5865 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | |
5866 instead of constant strings. | |
5867 | |
5868 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | |
5869 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | |
5870 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | |
5871 | |
5872 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | |
5873 in the same way as before. | |
5874 | |
5875 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | |
5876 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | |
5877 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | |
5878 | |
5879 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | |
5880 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | |
5881 else, and returns nil. | |
5882 | |
5883 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | |
5884 directory cannot be listed. | |
5885 | |
5886 ** Changes in minibuffer input | |
5887 | |
5888 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | |
5889 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | |
5890 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | |
5891 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | |
5892 ways: | |
5893 | |
5894 It is returned if the user enters empty input. | |
5895 It is available through the history command M-n. | |
5896 | |
5897 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | |
5898 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | |
5899 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | |
5900 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | |
5901 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | |
5902 | |
5903 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | |
5904 argument in this way. | |
5905 | |
5906 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | |
5907 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | |
5908 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | |
5909 | |
5910 ** Echo area features | |
5911 | |
5912 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | |
5913 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | |
5914 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | |
5915 after the echo area is cleared. | |
5916 | |
5917 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | |
5918 in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | |
5919 | |
5920 ** Keyboard input features | |
5921 | |
5922 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | |
5923 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | |
5924 | |
5925 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | |
5926 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | |
5927 by keyboard macros. | |
5928 | |
5929 ** Frame-related changes | |
5930 | |
5931 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | |
5932 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | |
5933 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | |
5934 | |
5935 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | |
5936 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | |
5937 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | |
5938 | |
5939 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
5940 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | |
5941 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | |
5942 in the selected frame. | |
5943 | |
5944 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | |
5945 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | |
5946 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | |
5947 | |
5948 ** X Windows features | |
5949 | |
5950 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | |
5951 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | |
5952 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | |
5953 | |
5954 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | |
5955 The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | |
5956 | |
5957 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | |
5958 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | |
5959 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | |
5960 | |
5961 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | |
5962 it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | |
5963 | |
5964 ** Subprocess features | |
5965 | |
5966 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | |
5967 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | |
5968 automatically. | |
5969 | |
5970 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | |
5971 and returns the output from the command as a string. | |
5972 | |
5973 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | |
5974 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | |
5975 | |
5976 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | |
5977 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | |
5978 | |
5979 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | |
5980 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | |
5981 goes after the other menu items. | |
5982 | |
5983 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | |
5984 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls | |
5985 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks | |
5986 are in use. | |
5987 | |
5988 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | |
5989 series of several changes--if that seems safe. | |
5990 | |
5991 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | |
5992 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | |
5993 form. | |
5994 | |
5995 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | |
5996 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | |
5997 but its hook is still run. | |
5998 | |
5999 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | |
6000 for errors that are handled by condition-case. | |
6001 | |
6002 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | |
6003 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | |
6004 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | |
6005 | |
6006 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | |
6007 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | |
6008 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | |
6009 warned. | |
6010 | |
6011 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | |
6012 way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | |
6013 | |
6014 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | |
6015 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | |
6016 functions like display-time. | |
6017 | |
6018 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | |
6019 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | |
6020 | |
6021 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | |
6022 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | |
6023 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | |
6024 | |
6025 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | |
6026 if there is an error in compilation. | |
6027 | |
6028 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | |
6029 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | |
6030 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | |
6031 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | |
6032 | |
6033 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | |
6034 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | |
6035 the *scratch* buffer. | |
6036 | |
6037 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | |
6038 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | |
6039 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | |
6040 e.g., in Font Lock mode. | |
6041 | |
6042 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | |
6043 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | |
6044 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | |
6045 | |
6046 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | |
6047 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | |
6048 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | |
6049 and compose-mail-other-frame. | |
6050 | |
6051 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | |
6052 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | |
6053 full name of the specified user will be returned. | |
6054 | |
6055 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | |
6056 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | |
6057 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | |
6058 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | |
6059 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | |
6060 files at all. | |
6061 | |
6062 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | |
6063 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | |
6064 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | |
6065 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | |
6066 | |
6067 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | |
6068 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | |
6069 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | |
6070 is how %S normally pads to two positions. | |
6071 | |
6072 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | |
6073 | |
6074 ** imenu.el changes. | |
6075 | |
6076 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | |
6077 item from menu created by imenu. | |
6078 | |
6079 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | |
6080 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | |
6081 select one of those items. | |
6082 | |
6083 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. | |
6084 | |
6085 * Changes in Emacs 19.33. | |
6086 | |
6087 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major | |
6088 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.) | |
6089 | |
6090 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to | |
6091 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on. | |
6092 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works. | |
6093 | |
6094 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
6095 | |
6096 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error. | |
6097 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f. | |
6098 | |
6099 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
6100 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it | |
6101 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the | |
6102 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional | |
6103 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is | |
6104 all caps. | |
6105 | |
6106 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame | |
6107 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame. | |
6108 | |
6109 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2 | |
6110 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same | |
6111 as in previous Emacs versions. | |
6112 | |
6113 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a | |
6114 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any | |
6115 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple | |
6116 frames. | |
6117 | |
6118 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value | |
6119 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu. | |
6120 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the | |
6121 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by | |
6122 accident. | |
6123 | |
6124 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined | |
6125 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region. | |
6126 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that | |
6127 line and then executing the macro. | |
6128 | |
6129 This command is not new, but was never documented before. | |
6130 | |
6131 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant | |
6132 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter | |
6133 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting | |
6134 characters. | |
6135 | |
6136 ** Font Lock mode | |
6137 | |
6138 *** Font Lock support modes | |
6139 | |
6140 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see | |
6141 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the | |
6142 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode | |
6143 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when | |
6144 Font Lock mode is enabled. | |
6145 | |
6146 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put: | |
6147 | |
6148 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode) | |
6149 | |
6150 in your ~/.emacs. | |
6151 | |
6152 *** lazy-lock | |
6153 | |
6154 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur | |
6155 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer | |
6156 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and | |
6157 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events | |
6158 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the | |
6159 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until | |
6160 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time. | |
6161 | |
6162 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs: | |
6163 | |
6164 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode) | |
6165 | |
6166 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'. | |
6167 | |
6168 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
6169 | |
6170 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or | |
6171 paren and key. | |
6172 | |
6173 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now | |
6174 supported. | |
6175 | |
6176 ** Gnus changes. | |
6177 | |
6178 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new | |
6179 commands and variables have been added. There should be no | |
6180 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the | |
6181 previously released version, except in the message composition area. | |
6182 | |
6183 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes | |
6184 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive. | |
6185 | |
6186 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization | |
6187 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now | |
6188 obsolete. | |
6189 | |
6190 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where | |
6191 missing articles are represented by empty nodes. | |
6192 | |
6193 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some) | |
6194 | |
6195 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server. | |
6196 | |
6197 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil) | |
6198 | |
6199 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are | |
6200 referred. | |
6201 | |
6202 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions: | |
6203 | |
6204 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t) | |
6205 | |
6206 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed. | |
6207 | |
6208 (setq gnus-use-trees t) | |
6209 | |
6210 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary | |
6211 buffers. | |
6212 | |
6213 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode) | |
6214 | |
6215 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode: | |
6216 | |
6217 `M-x gnus-binary-mode' | |
6218 | |
6219 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy. | |
6220 | |
6221 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode) | |
6222 | |
6223 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail. | |
6224 | |
6225 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'. | |
6226 | |
6227 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency | |
6228 is possible. | |
6229 | |
6230 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group) | |
6231 | |
6232 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on | |
6233 groups of groups. | |
6234 | |
6235 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups. | |
6236 | |
6237 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news | |
6238 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else. | |
6239 | |
6240 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets. | |
6241 | |
6242 *** The Gnus cache is much faster. | |
6243 | |
6244 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria. | |
6245 | |
6246 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank) | |
6247 | |
6248 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and | |
6249 expiration times. | |
6250 | |
6251 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used. | |
6252 | |
6253 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on | |
6254 process marked articles on the `M P' submap. | |
6255 | |
6256 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available | |
6257 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been | |
6258 bound to keys on the `/' submap. | |
6259 | |
6260 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving | |
6261 articles with the `*' command. | |
6262 | |
6263 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles. | |
6264 | |
6265 *** Article headers can be buttonized. | |
6266 | |
6267 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head) | |
6268 | |
6269 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID. | |
6270 | |
6271 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the | |
6272 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable. | |
6273 | |
6274 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article | |
6275 buffer. | |
6276 | |
6277 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'. | |
6278 | |
6279 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process. | |
6280 | |
6281 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam. | |
6282 | |
6283 (setq gnus-use-nocem t) | |
6284 | |
6285 *** Groups can be made permanently visible. | |
6286 | |
6287 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:") | |
6288 | |
6289 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier. | |
6290 | |
6291 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header. | |
6292 | |
6293 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header. | |
6294 | |
6295 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function | |
6296 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references) | |
6297 | |
6298 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid | |
6299 refetching. | |
6300 | |
6301 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50) | |
6302 | |
6303 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate | |
6304 buffer to allow easier treatment. | |
6305 | |
6306 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'. | |
6307 | |
6308 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving. | |
6309 | |
6310 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t) | |
6311 | |
6312 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching | |
6313 articles. | |
6314 | |
6315 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view) | |
6316 | |
6317 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text. | |
6318 | |
6319 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much | |
6320 cited text to hide is now customizable. | |
6321 | |
6322 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2) | |
6323 | |
6324 *** Boring headers can be hidden. | |
6325 | |
6326 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers) | |
6327 | |
6328 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar. | |
6329 | |
6330 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added. | |
6331 | |
6332 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features | |
6333 in greater detail. | |
6334 | |
6335 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
6336 | |
6337 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional | |
6338 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not | |
6339 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already | |
6340 exists. | |
6341 | |
6342 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors, | |
6343 as well as lists. | |
6344 | |
6345 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap | |
6346 of a given keymap. | |
6347 | |
6348 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a | |
6349 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a | |
6350 keymap or nil. | |
6351 | |
6352 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really | |
6353 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real" | |
6354 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil | |
6355 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for | |
6356 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the | |
6357 alias. | |
6358 | |
6359 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31 | |
6360 | |
6361 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States. | |
6362 | |
6363 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act. | |
6364 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law | |
6365 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans | |
6366 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any | |
6367 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited. | |
6368 | |
6369 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what | |
6370 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site | |
6371 `http://www.vtw.org/'. | |
6372 | |
6373 ** A note about C mode indentation customization. | |
6374 | |
6375 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style | |
6376 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode. | |
6377 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are | |
6378 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs | |
6379 chapter of the manual for details. | |
6380 | |
6381 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old | |
6382 customization variables take effect. | |
6383 | |
6384 ** Marking with the mouse. | |
6385 | |
6386 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains | |
6387 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are | |
6388 using M-x transient-mark-mode. | |
6389 | |
6390 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support. | |
6391 | |
6392 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95. | |
6393 | |
6394 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used | |
6395 to work on NT only and not on 95.) | |
6396 | |
6397 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems | |
6398 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as | |
6399 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS | |
6400 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS | |
6401 applications, these problems are significant. | |
6402 | |
6403 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is | |
6404 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy. | |
6405 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess | |
6406 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any | |
6407 other DOS application as a subprocess. | |
6408 | |
6409 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess. | |
6410 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess. | |
6411 | |
6412 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate | |
6413 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably | |
6414 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy. | |
6415 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two | |
6416 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing | |
6417 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes. | |
6418 | |
6419 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode. | |
6420 | |
6421 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in | |
6422 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the | |
6423 minibuffer contains. | |
6424 | |
6425 ** `title' frame parameter and resource. | |
6426 | |
6427 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else. | |
6428 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources. | |
6429 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise | |
6430 affects just the displayed title of the frame. | |
6431 | |
6432 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do: | |
6433 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources, | |
6434 and also serves as the default for the displayed title | |
6435 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil. | |
6436 | |
6437 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new | |
6438 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer). | |
6439 | |
6440 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the | |
6441 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual | |
6442 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif. | |
6443 | |
6444 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif | |
6445 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add | |
6446 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds | |
6447 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12: | |
6448 | |
6449 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12 | |
6450 | |
6451 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases | |
6452 to replace the characters it "deletes". | |
6453 | |
6454 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message. | |
6455 | |
6456 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts | |
6457 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it, | |
6458 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command. | |
6459 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message | |
6460 immediately after the selected one. | |
6461 | |
6462 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly | |
6463 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs. | |
6464 | |
6465 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory. | |
6466 | |
6467 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home | |
6468 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover. | |
6469 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If | |
6470 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x | |
6471 recover-session. | |
6472 | |
6473 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting | |
6474 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session | |
6475 will not work. | |
6476 | |
6477 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on | |
6478 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off | |
6479 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this | |
6480 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so | |
6481 now that the bug is fixed. | |
6482 | |
6483 ** Changes to Version Control (VC) | |
6484 | |
6485 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do | |
6486 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control. | |
6487 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system, | |
6488 which is dangerous and probably not what you want. | |
6489 | |
6490 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file, | |
6491 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default), | |
6492 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil, | |
6493 the link is visited and a warning displayed. | |
6494 | |
6495 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language. | |
6496 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which | |
6497 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters). | |
6498 | |
6499 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and | |
6500 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they | |
6501 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language. | |
6502 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language, | |
6503 remain normal. | |
6504 | |
6505 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various | |
6506 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...). | |
6507 | |
6508 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups | |
6509 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header | |
6510 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since | |
6511 Followup-To usually just holds one of those. | |
6512 | |
6513 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list | |
6514 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides | |
6515 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user | |
6516 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the | |
6517 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and | |
6518 `mail-directory-stream'.) | |
6519 | |
6520 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured) | |
6521 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named | |
6522 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible | |
6523 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s. | |
6524 | |
6525 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and | |
6526 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be | |
6527 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results). | |
6528 | |
6529 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or | |
6530 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for | |
6531 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit / | |
6532 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable. | |
6533 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to | |
6534 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due | |
6535 to a limitation in font-lock). | |
6536 | |
6537 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving. | |
6538 | |
6539 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current | |
6540 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all | |
6541 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in | |
6542 this example: | |
6543 | |
6544 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook | |
6545 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index"))) | |
6546 | |
6547 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
6548 | |
6549 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores. | |
6550 | |
6551 *** Font Lock mode is now supported. | |
6552 | |
6553 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive. | |
6554 | |
6555 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new | |
6556 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting | |
6557 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or | |
6558 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c | |
6559 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it. | |
6560 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil. | |
6561 | |
6562 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q | |
6563 does the same job. | |
6564 | |
6565 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author = | |
6566 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported. | |
6567 | |
6568 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help | |
6569 text. | |
6570 | |
6571 ** Font Lock mode | |
6572 | |
6573 *** Global Font Lock mode | |
6574 | |
6575 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the | |
6576 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable | |
6577 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically | |
6578 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned | |
6579 on globally where the buffer mode supports it. | |
6580 | |
6581 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put: | |
6582 | |
6583 (global-font-lock-mode t) | |
6584 | |
6585 in your ~/.emacs. | |
6586 | |
6587 *** Local Refontification | |
6588 | |
6589 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only. | |
6590 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines, | |
6591 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new | |
6592 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block). | |
6593 | |
6594 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function. | |
6595 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the | |
6596 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines | |
6597 above and below point. | |
6598 | |
6599 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point. | |
6600 | |
6601 ** Follow mode | |
6602 | |
6603 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same | |
6604 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two | |
6605 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if | |
6606 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window, | |
6607 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x | |
6608 follow-mode. | |
6609 | |
6610 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled. | |
6611 | |
6612 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the | |
6613 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split. | |
6614 | |
6615 ** hide-show changes. | |
6616 | |
6617 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed | |
6618 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for | |
6619 normal hooks. | |
6620 | |
6621 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands. | |
6622 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q. | |
6623 | |
6624 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are | |
6625 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are | |
6626 those that begin a function, record, or macro. | |
6627 | |
6628 ** MSDOS Changes | |
6629 | |
6630 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP. | |
6631 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works. | |
6632 | |
6633 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten | |
6634 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs. | |
6635 | |
6636 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak. | |
6637 | |
6638 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously | |
6639 pressing both mouse buttons. | |
6640 | |
6641 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had | |
6642 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones | |
6643 are: | |
6644 | |
6645 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package) | |
6646 now works. | |
6647 | |
6648 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode). | |
6649 | |
6650 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new | |
6651 implementation of Emacs timers, see below). | |
6652 | |
6653 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards. | |
6654 | |
6655 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms. | |
6656 | |
6657 **** `M-x recover-session' works. | |
6658 | |
6659 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors. | |
6660 | |
6661 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works. | |
6662 | |
6663 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31. | |
6664 | |
6665 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95 | |
6666 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a | |
6667 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in | |
6668 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this | |
6669 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it. | |
6670 | |
6671 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values. | |
6672 | |
6673 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux', | |
6674 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type' | |
6675 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also | |
6676 be different. | |
6677 | |
6678 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather | |
6679 than `system-type'. | |
6680 | |
6681 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this. | |
6682 | |
6683 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process | |
6684 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them. | |
6685 | |
6686 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers | |
6687 that pointed into or next to the deleted text. | |
6688 | |
6689 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and | |
6690 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more | |
6691 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays. | |
6692 | |
6693 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer | |
6694 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks | |
6695 like this: | |
6696 | |
6697 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
6698 | |
6699 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens. | |
6700 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer | |
6701 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS. | |
6702 | |
6703 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in | |
6704 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0 | |
6705 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once. | |
6706 | |
6707 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give | |
6708 up if too much time passes. | |
6709 | |
6710 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...) | |
6711 | |
6712 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds. | |
6713 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value | |
6714 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last | |
6715 form in BODY. | |
6716 | |
6717 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for | |
6718 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A | |
6719 call looks like this: | |
6720 | |
6721 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
6722 | |
6723 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer | |
6724 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the | |
6725 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments | |
6726 ARGS. | |
6727 | |
6728 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse | |
6729 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse | |
6730 command. | |
6731 | |
6732 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each | |
6733 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer | |
6734 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after | |
6735 each time Emacs becomes idle. | |
6736 | |
6737 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is | |
6738 idle for SECS seconds. | |
6739 | |
6740 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at | |
6741 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your | |
6742 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers | |
6743 instead. | |
6744 | |
6745 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if | |
6746 there is no answer within a certain time. | |
6747 | |
6748 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE) | |
6749 | |
6750 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers | |
6751 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave. | |
6752 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE. | |
6753 | |
6754 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven | |
6755 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual | |
6756 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the | |
6757 arguments in between are ignored. | |
6758 | |
6759 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as | |
6760 the list of arguments for `encode-time'. | |
6761 | |
6762 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory | |
6763 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to | |
6764 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for | |
6765 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs | |
6766 version. | |
6767 | |
6768 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs | |
6769 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating | |
6770 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that | |
6771 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself | |
6772 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the | |
6773 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve. | |
6774 | |
6775 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or | |
6776 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating | |
6777 systems with limited file name syntax. | |
6778 | |
6779 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function | |
6780 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form | |
6781 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file | |
6782 completions.el: | |
6783 | |
6784 (defvar save-completions-file-name | |
6785 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions") | |
6786 "*The filename to save completions to.") | |
6787 | |
6788 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that | |
6789 depends on the operating system, because the definition of | |
6790 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On | |
6791 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On | |
6792 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system. | |
6793 | |
6794 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument | |
6795 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the | |
6796 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.) | |
6797 | |
6798 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process | |
6799 marker from its buffer position. | |
6800 | |
6801 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether | |
6802 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection. | |
6803 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages. | |
6804 | |
6805 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors | |
6806 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error | |
6807 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any | |
6808 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions | |
6809 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger, | |
6810 regardless of the value of debug-on-error. | |
6811 | |
6812 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting | |
6813 errors that happen often during editing. | |
6814 | |
6815 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum | |
6816 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case | |
6817 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened. | |
6818 | |
6819 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window | |
6820 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window. | |
6821 | |
6822 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying | |
6823 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer | |
6824 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames | |
6825 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc., | |
6826 and not get-buffer-window. | |
6827 | |
6828 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions, | |
6829 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer | |
6830 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them. | |
6831 | |
6832 If you use this feature, you should set the variable | |
6833 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a | |
6834 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a | |
6835 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions | |
6836 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil | |
6837 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called | |
6838 over and over for the same text. | |
6839 | |
6840 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el | |
6841 | |
6842 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written | |
6843 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command: | |
6844 | |
6845 ;; @(#) HEADER: text | |
6846 ;; $HEADER: text $ | |
6847 | |
6848 in addition to the normal | |
6849 | |
6850 ;; HEADER: text | |
6851 | |
6852 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify | |
6853 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and | |
6854 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information. | |
6855 | |
6856 * For older news, see the file ONEWS. | |
6857 | |
6858 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
6859 Copyright information: | |
6860 | |
6861 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
6862 | |
6863 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
6864 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
6865 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
6866 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
6867 | |
6868 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
6869 of this document, or of portions of it, | |
6870 under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
6871 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
6872 | |
6873 Local variables: | |
6874 mode: outline | |
6875 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" | |
6876 end: |